Home

Quadro Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

1. Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error message will appear Fig Il 79 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for pickup extension page The Edit Pickup Group link leads to the page where a list of monitored extensions can be defined Gam tees ise lege Baaren ye Heraut Pickup Group of Extension 67 The Pickup Group of Extension page lists all available regular and virtual extensions on the Quadro and allows you to manage the Pickup Group The Enable functional button is used to include the selected extension s to the Pickup Group of the corresponding pickup extension The extensions in the Pickup Group can be monitored by the pickup extension The calls addressed to the extensions in the Pickup Group can be answered by the pickup extension The Disable functional button is used to exclude the selected extension s from the Pickup Group of the corresponding pickup extension Fig Il 80 Pickup Group of Extension page The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for the users to use the pickup service can be defined Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 42 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus an S4om loos Telephony Ther ret Upin Nelweak Access List of Extension 67 Aid Git Delete Select af f
2. ISDN trunk statistics are not displayed on this page at first but the page is automatically refreshed every 10 minutes Statistics collected from that time as well as the last resetting of the counter will be displayed there System Uptime Current System Time and Last Time Cleared last time ISDN statistics has been cleared are displayed at the bottom of the page To reset the statistics counters press the Clear button External PSTN Gateways The External PSTN Gateways page allows Quadro to use the PSTN lines FXO lines and or ISDN trunks on other Quadros This provides the option to call not only through local PSTN lines but also through available shared FXO or ISDN lines in the network of Quadros When the sharing mode is enabled and one Quadro is configured to use the shared PSTN lines of another Quadro the corresponding routing patterns will automatically be created in the Call Routing Tables see Call Routing on both Quadros This will allow PSTN call routing between the two Quadros Attention Any changes on this page will lead to the corresponding configuration changes on the slave device affecting the FXO or ISDN lines that are currently being used by the actual Quadro The Use PSTN lines of the other device checkbox is used to enable Quadro to use the shared PSTN lines on a remote device This selection requires you to configure the Authorization Parameters Use the same named link to access the Authorization Parameters table
3. 2 Select the RSA key length and press Generate to generate a new RSA public key This may take several seconds 3 Enter a destination e mail address in the Email this key to peer text field then press Send to send the new RSA public key To Delete Stop Start Enable Disable a VPN Connection 1 Select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding connections that should to be deleted stopped started from the Connections tables Press Select all to delete stop start all connections 2 Click on the Delete Stop Start button from the table s menu to perform the corresponding operation for the selected VPN connection s 3 If deleting confirm it with pressing on Yes The VPN connection will be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the VPN connection in the list click No Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 98 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Dynamic DNS Settings The Dynamic DNS DynDNS is a service that is used to map a dynamic IP address to a host name This service is used if you are connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and PPP DHCP client and want to allow access from the Internet to a device behind the firewall For example if you want to run your own WEB server To enable the DynDNS service on Quadro you first have to choose a DynDNS provider and register at their website The Dynamic DNS Settings page provides the following components Ban Sten U
4. Checkboxes below on this page are used to select those log types that should be accessible remotely Select only those logs that you f Fig Il 57 System Logs System Remote Logs Settings page wish to have monitored remotely Man Symen User feleptomy tilet Uplink Helah E epysi D a Hii System Logs DSP dading Srifer Mamit Loge Getings Wierm Sirabam ops mummumsa Application Log Started A J00TIOTH G 0557 1f sssaaa ssssrs 16 Jul Py tarara 559 0401 635 PMG Started treeaiote f HIP ES Seting DSP CPU hoquonty 720 MHE 695 gra peihana PORTO Channala d HUB FRE Sloppod BAT FHE Started dmasinie 3 59511065 FAO 1E TA Gain Satie 0 ae O56 FHD 16 RH Gain gat ta 6 di DSP FRO Vr TX Gain sel bo Ob O47 FAO 17 AX Gain gel to E oD Egia tes So Setiching PORT Mode 1 oe 0 Channgipa z 426 FXO Botering nora mode ime 451 arb FXO 1h Sirbi onion AFTAG VF State arioak Sa 30 335 Fae Gapped HEEE Slatted pinasok 2 399 BS Changing sym to Meee Oo In the View System Logs page you may view the generated logs Sr In aah on the Quadro System logs are useful to determine any king of LE Sn problems on the Quadro as well as to monitor the user s access Nine ee and the usage of it DAD ABE IT CID ESK DEMEL o SS 099 GRR Rare 17 CiD DTHF Dealeri nat Tauns i sadi Add 1 CID generation Tyee Cin hook FSE anemi toe 19 Dale 07100554 HE On the left side of the page a list of main logs is displayed HMM ARETA EEUE
5. The total number of question marks inside and outside the braces brackets The more question marks a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of question marks outside braces brackets The more question marks outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 4 The number of square brackets The more brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of braces The more braces a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of asterisks The fewer asterisks a pattern contains the higher its priority The value of the metric The lower the metric of a pattern is the higher its priority The position in the routing table The higher the position of a pattern in the routing table is the higher its priority Example The user has dialed 1231 and the following matching patterns have been found Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 85 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The list of patterns 41 123 11 15 3 221 123 1 3 1 3 100 150 asd 1 12 31 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 tk kI Step 1 The list is split into two groups separating the patterns with form a group with a lower priority and are pushed back to the end of the list from
6. password indicates the password defined in the field Password to indicates the password defined in the field SMS Recipient Address from indicates the password defined in the field SMS Sender Address text indicates the SMS text generated by Quadro voice mail notification event notification etc Server text field requires the IP address or the host name of the SMS gateway Port text field requires the port number of the SMS gateway Use Secure HTTP checkbox enables access to SMS server via HTTPS Checkbox selection enables a Secure Port text field that requires the port number for HTTPS traffic Request Method manipulation radio buttons allow to select the HTTP request method used by Quadro the access the SMS gateway POST or GET Send Test SMS is used to send a test SMS to the defined SMS Recipient Address This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page Firmware Update This window allows updating the software of Quadro by installing new firmware image Users registered at Epygi will receive a notice when new firmware is available and will be able to download it from the Epygi Technical Support WEB page Updating new firmware requires a working power supply Quadro is provided with a battery accumulator If the battery is low or simply absent the There is no battery or voltage is low warning is displayed Please Note Installing new firmware will take about 15 minut
7. Connection Type drop down list allows to select the type of the connection PPTP or L2TP The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 2 consists of the following components The Peer Name text field requires the connection peer name If you are about to create a client connection then the server s name should be defined here If you are creating a server connection then the client s name should be defined here Please Note When creating a connection with a Windows Server ensure that a user with the Quadro s host name and Dial in access exists on the server When creating a connection with a Windows Client ensure that the Peer name specified on this page matches the Dial in connection s username Please Note The input in the Peer Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and no connection can be created The Password text field requires the password for the connection establishment an Sete Users belephony fier eet Up PPTP L2TP Configuration Dihet TF Sian Slop Add Cdn Deletes Select all lense Selection Cowen Hune lis Fig Il 174 PPTP L2TP Configuration page Mam System Users Telephony Phetivet Upline PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Add PPTP L2TP Connection Fig ll 175 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 Man Stem Users Telephony Ber reed Utena Metwork PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard PPTP Connection Properties MyConnection PIES a Ei Provide Fig
8. Men Syviem Users Teleg nnry liflet ret Uptire Netwoth oli Tabset s SW Setings Quadro4x Mz r sems NAT Traversal Seting Active Calls Ative Cals Cou Cal Shri lene OG Gep 2007 124023 O8 Sep JOO7T 1274754 all Routng OfSep 2007 174618 1 Fig Il 106 Telephony Menu in Plain Theme Fig Il 105 Telephony Menu in Dynamo Theme Call Statistics The Call Statistics page displays four tables They provide information on successful unsuccessful and missed incoming and outgoing calls on the first three tables and statistics settings on the fourth page Call statistics allows the collecting of call events on the Quadro with their parameters and to search them by various criteria The Statistics Settings page offers the following input options The Enable Call Reporting checkbox enables Call Statistics reporting The selected number of statistics entries will be displayed in the Call Statistics tables The Maximal Number of Displayed Call Records drop down lists are used to select the number of Successful Missed and Unsuccessful Outgoing statistics entries to be displayed in the corresponding Call Statistics tables If the record numbers exceed the numbers specified in these drop down lists the oldest record will be removed The Download All Call Statistics link is used to download whole displayed statistics in a file that can be viewed with a simple text editor This type of call statistics file is more easy to pal Sates s tartngs
9. Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 31 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Download all Logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar archive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro Main Sysiem Usea Conferences Telephony ingeni Uplink Hieetevork System Logs The System Remote Logs Settings page is used to adjust the system logging settings and contains the following components aankan Sias Selim ROMO loas ninna Cte se Los Enable Remote Logging Telnet via 205 poe H Grable Cal Canteling leg Gristle SIP User Agent Log The Enable Remote Logging checkbox is used to enable remote monitoring of Quadro s logs When this option is selected remote administrators may connect Quadro with Telnet protocol port yl Brable Media Steam Log z Eribe OSF Leg F Enable SP Registration Log Enable ysin Messages Log X M Grable FOF Log M Grable Vaice Mall System Leg number 645 and access the logs selected on this page This is Baia a done for remote Quadro s diagnostics and is mainly used by E Enable CxS Hat Log El enable ISDN L2 Leg Epygi s Technical Support Office To make the Quadro s logs open E Enable SONLI Log for remote access appropriate Firewall level or Filtering Rules Cem Ce must be created ee iE DOLIO eM ee hii Ai rigiri riirii
10. The Authorization Parameters page is used to create accounts for the remote Quadros allowing them to connect the Quadro and share the available PSTN lines The table on this page lists all registered accounts and account information It will show the corresponding authentication parameters username and password and date time of the last registration The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new account can be configured A Username and a Password is required for a new account on this page To use the shared remote PSTN lines Enable the Use PSTN lines of the other device checkbox Press Save to apply the selection Enter the Authorization Parameters page PEST Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Create an account using a unique Username and a Password Man System Usas Telephony iiet reed pirk Metwotk External PSTN Gateways Fig Il 139 External PSTN Gateways page Main System Users Teteptroery breriet Lipdink Network External PSTN Gateways Authorization Parameters Fig ll 140 External PSTN Gateways Authorization Parameters page 75 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Gain Control The Gain Control settings are used to define transmit and receive gains For FXS lines Transmit Gain defines the phone speaker volume on the call Receive Gain defines the volume of the phone microphone on the call For FXO lines ISDN trunk Transmit Gain defines
11. read and can be aligned in a spreadsheet Bim em hein fps CETEL frien hk The Download All Call Statistics old format link is used to download whole displayed statistics in an old formatted file This file can also be viewed with a simple text editor but contains more intricately aligned content The Clear all Records button is used to clear all statistics Fig Il 107 Call Statistics Settings page records When the number of Call Statistics entries exceeds the numbers specified in the Statistics Settings page the oldest entries are being automatically deleted In order to keep the call statistics entries safe Quadro allows you to configure an automatic download service of the call statistics The Automatically Download page is used to configure the automatic downloading of the call statistics Two options of downloading the call statistics are available uploading the call statistics file to the server or sending it to the mailing address This page consists of the following components The Enable Automatically Download Call Statistics checkbox enables automatic downloading mechanism of the call statistics Please Note This service only refers to the statistics collected Call Statisties Automatically Dawnload from the moment of enabling this service and forward any 3 previously generated statistics will not be downloaded Bims Wye thei felpiee ister nerd Phat CET The Number of Call Records to Download drop down l
12. Default Incoming Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Incoming Blocking Message Outgoing Blocking Message Listen to Current Outgoing Blocking Message 2 Record a Universal Outgoing Blocking Message Restore System Default Outgoing Blocking Message Stop Recording or Playback Outgoing Blocking Message Administrator s Logout Your Name Listen to Current Name recorded 2 Record a Universal Name Restore System Default Name Stop Recording or Playback Name Message Out of Office Message Listen to Current Out of Office Message Record a Universal Out of Office Message Restore System Default Out of Office Message Stop Recording or Playback Out of Office Message 114 Quadro Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page This welcome page may be helpful if administrators want to inform their extension users about individual data they need to use the extensions such as phone numbers phone lines IP addresses and SIP numbers To get a word form that may be edited and sent by mail double click on the paperclip sidewise Welcome You are using a Quadro Voice Router made by Epygi Technologies Ltd This product incorporates SIPVoice Digital Signal Processing technology to send crystal clear voice around the globe without associated fees for long distance But you wi
13. Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Parameter Dial Timeouts 3PCC Settings RTP Streaming Channels IPSec PPTP and L2TP Dynamic DNS Firewall IDS NAT Filtering Rules DNS Server Settings DHCP Advanced Settings System Default Value 4 seconds Secure Connection disabled Request Timeout 10 Feature Key Not Installed WAN Port Not Open Undefined No connections RSA Key Management 1024 bit key defined PPTP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 1 0 24 Authentication MSCHAPv2 MPEE 128 bit L2TP Server Configuration Subnet 172 31 2 0 24 Disabled Enabled Medium level Ping Stealth enabled Fool Portscanner disabled Enabled Enabled Outgoing Traffic MS File Sharing Blocked for all SIP Access Allowed for all No user defined services and IP pool groups Time to live TTL 86400 seconds Mail Exchange MX undefined No aliases defined DHCP Options Gateways 172 30 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Domain name servers 172 30 0 1 NBT name servers 0 0 0 0 NTP servers 172 30 0 1 Domain name epygi config loc Overload tftp server name 172 30 01 DHCP Server Statements Authoritative enabled Ping Check enabled Ping timeout 1 sec Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Appendix System Default Values 121 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Extension Settin
14. Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 13 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Lines Status table of each FXO Line provides information about the Allowed Call Types the extension number attendant or routing client to whom the Incoming Call is Routed To and the State of the line Free or Busy The FXO Channel Usage Statistics link is only present for local FXO lines this option is not available for shared FXO lines and leads to the page where diagram chart of FXO lines usage can be viewed The FXO Channel Usage Statistics page consists of following components used to define the chart parameters Trunk checkboxes are used to select the FXO line number s over which the FXO traffic chart will be built At least one Trunk checkbox should be selected otherwise error message appears Time range of statistic table drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram chart that is to be built Incoming Calls and Outgoing Calls checkboxes are used to select whether the FXO traffic statistics for only incoming or outgoing or for both type of calls should be displayed in the diagram chart Maximum Active Calls checkbox is used to have the number of maximum active calls displayed in the diagram chart At least one of these checkboxes should be selected otherwise error message appears Show button is used to generate an FXO channels usage diagram chart over the paramet
15. declined The bandwidth provided by the ISP has to be specified in the text fields Upstream Speed and Downstream Speed The default entry in both fields is 10000 the maximum bandwidth of a 10 MB Ethernet In most cases providers offer a smaller bandwidth than 10000 kbit s The bandwidth required by an IP call depends on the codecs used and these specifications are listed in the tables below Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Required Bandwidth for Standard Packets Packet Size in msec G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 10 105 58 66 20 84 37 45 30 76 30 38 40 74 27 34 50 71 25 32 60 67 29 30 Required Bandwidth for Encrypted Packets when a VPN is used Packet Size in msec G 711u G 711a G 726 16 G 726 24 10 148 98 105 20 105 59 65 30 90 43 52 40 85 38 45 50 80 34 41 60 74 29 37 Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a 74 82 50 53 61 29 45 53 22 42 50 19 40 48 17 37 45 15 Needed bandwidth in kbit s using the Codecs G 726 32 G 726 40 G 729a 118 124 92 74 81 49 60 66 35 53 61 30 48 56 26 45 52 22 Administrator s Menus ILBC 13 33 2 20 ILBC 13 33 41 26 The Min Data Rate text field requires the amount of upstream bandwidth that ought to remain for data applications even if voice applications use the entire available upstream bandwidth The value selected here needs to be smaller than th
16. the call will be skipped In case of no feedback from the call controlling application the call will be accepted after a timeout defined in the configuration of the call controlling application The Failover Reason s radio buttons indicate whether the system should use the next matching pattern if call setup with the current routing rule fails and allows choosing the reasons to be considered as a failover Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 80 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e None indicates that matching patterns should not be used regardless of the failover reason e Failover Reason s indicates possible failure reasons Failure reasons vary depending on the call type selected on the previous page If the call cannot be established due to selected Failure Reasons the call routing table will be parsed for the next matching pattern and if found the call will be routed to the specified destination e Cannot Establish Connection failure reason is available for FXO and ISDN only and indicates cases when connection cannot be established e Busy available for PBX SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when the dialed destination is busy e Wrong Number available for PBX SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when the dialed number is wrong Network Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates ca
17. the person s that should to receive the newly arrived voice mails on their email accounts Use a space or a comma to separate the mailing addresses in the text field e The next two fields are used for retransmission of voice mails via email Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the voice mail will be delivered via email to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the voice mail is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field e Remove Voice Mail on send removes the voice mail from the user mailbox after sending it to the email recipient s Later ha Main Vaca Mail Your Extension Supphemenary Series Voice Mail Profiles Extension 11 Ady Eee Diele Prony Aare Di WWE fer Home CI VRS for Oiio WES for Urgent alls Main Voice Mai Your Extension SUDAN Dary Senices Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry Extension 11 Prefila ame Wiis for Office Back Fa Ld 22 a lei ai SON Lis Ai Lig A naM rere epygi T e e Fig Il 205 Voice Mail Profiles Add Entry page Main Voice Mai Tour Extension SUDRITen bry Services Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry Extension 11 Larne Mail message Jurata min 4 E Send MPA WHS MISS aGes id mai Fl Enable ZereQut E mail aitas Minaa Readiegdcsi bpe PRE Repeal avery 5 min oo Radad abies Ma 10 lines hence Voit Mail On Send P
18. 1 Specify the destination address for the ICMP request in the Ping Target text field 2 Press the Ping button to process the ICMP request 3 Specify the destination address to trace the route 4 Press the Traceroute button to process the router triggering SNMP Settings The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices and is used by network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth On Quadro SNMP agent is running to allow administrators to remotely manage Quadro s network and the device s configuration Remote administration is being performed by means of special SNMP monitoring programs SNMP Manager which can automatically feedback by the certainly configured actions on some events on the Quadro or remotely modify Quadro s settings SNMP Settings page is divided into two pages Global SNMP Settings and SNMP Trap Settings Global SNMP Settings are used to enable the SNMP agent on the Quadro to select the SNMP protocol version for communication with the administrating application and to define the community for administrating application to connect the Quadro Enable SNMP checkbox is used to enable SNMP agent on the Quadro System Location text field requires optional information to describe the network where SNMP management is performed Quadro2x 2xi Q
19. 227 7013 as applicable Entire Agreement It is understood that this Agreement along with the Quadro Installation Guide and User s Manual constitute the complete and exclusive agreement between you and the Licensor and supersede any proposal or prior agreement or license oral or written and any other communications related to the subject matter hereof If one or more of the provisions of this Agreement is found to be illegal or unenforceable this Agreement shall not be rendered inoperative but the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect No Waiver Failure by either you or the Licensor to enforce any of the provisions of this Agreement or any rights with respect hereto shall in no way be considered to be a waiver of such provisions or rights or to in any way affect the validity of this Agreement If one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement are found to be invalid or unenforceable in any respect the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of Texas without regard to choice of law provisions that would cause the application of the law of another jurisdiction Attorneys Fees In the event of any litigation or other dispute arising as a result of or by reason of this Agreement the prevailing party in any such litigation or other dispute shall be entitled to in addi
20. 32 e Single URL requires the hostname of the allowed or blocked host e Group indicates the user defined groups that include IP addresses that should to be allowed or blocked The Description field is used to insert an optional description of the filtering rule To Add a Filtering Rule Administrator s Menus M m Sathen Users T l ph im Dried niet Lilik Hefei k Add Filtering Rules Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Filter PITTE Allrad uh Fy 168 Fig Il 183 Filtering Rules Page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic 1 Select the Filter link Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Outgoing Traffic Management Access SIP Access Blocked IP List Allowed IP List or Restricting IPSec to add a rule for it The corresponding Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Click Add on the Filtering Rules page A page where a new rule may be added will appear in the browser window The page will be named corresponding to the selected filter 3 Select a service name from the Service list to configure a rule for it If the list has a default value do not change the default values 4 Select an action from the Action list that is used in the rule If the list has a default value do not change the default values 5 Enter the IP address in the Forward to IP field if an Incoming Traffic Rule is to be added 6 Choose the restriction type by selecting Any Single IP IP Mask or Single URL and enter the required information
21. Guide Administrator s Menus Main Syaiem Users Telephony hribea meee Uplink Heawcdk Service Pool Configuration Add The Add page is used to add new services and includes the following text fields and buttons Service Name requires a name for the service that should be added Protocol includes a list of possible protocols to be selected Port Range requires a port range for the defined service Fig Il 185 Service Pool Page to add a new Service To Add a new Service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link on the Filtering Rules page 2 Click on the Add button on the Service Pool Configuration page A page where a new Service may be added will appear in the browser window Define a service name in the Service Name text field Select the protocol type for the service from the Protocol drop down list Enter the port range in the Port Range text fields or leave one of them empty to define a particular port for the service To add a service with these parameters click on Save mpa To Delete a Service 1 Select the Manage User Defined Services link The Service Pool Configuration page appears with the table of services if any 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding services that should be deleted from the Service Pool table Press Select all if all services should be deleted 3 Click on the Delete button on the Service Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cance
22. ID notification in FSK can show up to two lines of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display The first line shows the callers extension number The second line shows the caller s nickname if indicated in the configuration For external IP calls caller ID notification in FSK can also show up to two lines of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display The first line shows the caller s user name The second line shows the caller s nickname if indicated in configuration If the nickname is not available and there is a display name provided by the caller party the second line will display it otherwise the URL in the format username host will be displayed For calls from the PSTN network the entire caller ID message will be shown DTMF Standard The DTMF standard supports caller ID indication only if the phone handset is on hook phone is free and ready to accept calls This standard also has caller ID notification conditions but they are non configurable Caller ID notification in DTMF can show only one line of identifiable parameters on the called phone s display For internal calls it is the callers extension number For external IP calls it is the callers user name For calls from the PSTN network caller ID will only display the caller s phone number Please Note DTMF supports only parameters consisting of digits If any letter symbol has been used in the external caller user name DT MF will not display call
23. If the client is valid the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose name matches the request The user entry in the database contains a list of requirements username password etc that must be met to give access to the user If all conditions are met the user gets access to the Quadro Network The RADIUS Client Settings page contains the Enable RADIUS Client checkbox that enables RADIUS client on the Quadro Please Note The RADIUS Client cannot be disabled if there is at least one route with RADIUS Authentication and Authorization or RADIUS Accounting values configured in the AAA Required drop down list at the Call Routing table In order to be able to disable the RADIUS Client on the Quadro appropriate routes should be removed first The other RADIUS Client settings are divided into three groups Main System Users Telephony kaime Lapin Hetwork RADIUS Client Settings 1 Registration Settings The Primary Server requires the IP address of the primary Radius i Server EON mane TELEN The Secondary Server requires the IP address of the secondary Radius Server NAT Station IP text fields require the NAT PC WAN IP address If no NAT Station is specified here Quadro s IP address will be sent to the RADIUS server Secret Key is used to insert the secret key between the Radius client and the server Contact the Radius server administrator to get the secret key for your Quadro The Confirm Secret Key field is used
24. Loopback is disabled for all FXS lines Loopback timeout is 30 Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 119 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Parameter Line Settings for Quadro16x and Quadro16xi FXO Settings for Quadro2x FXO Settings for Quadro4x FXO Settings for Quadro16x ISDN Settings External PSTN Gateways Gain Control Settings SIP Tunnel Settings Call Routing RADIUS Settings Voice Mail Common Settings Appendix System Default Values System Default Value Onboard Lines Configuration CallerID Standard 2 FSK for all lines Ringer type Type A for all lines Busy Tone and Power Disconnect indications disabled for all lines Off hook caller ID disabled for all lines Hot Desking Capability disabled for all lines IP Lines Configuration Enable PnP for IP lines enabled Enable firmware version control enabled Phones Default Template systemdefault 1 50 IP Lines attached to 27 76 extensions IP lines 1 18 enabled others disabled All IP lines are in inactive mode IP Phone Templates no custom templates IP Phone Logo disabled no custom logos uploaded Disabled IP lines displayed FXS Lines Loopback Settings Loopback is disabled for all FXS lines Loopback timeout is 30 1 FXO line enabled incoming and outgoing calls allowed routed to 00 Attendant 2 FXO lines all lines enabled incoming and outgoing calls allowe
25. Now button is used to manually initiate Copyright C 2003 2008 Epyai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Check and notify or Check and update actions The action to be executed depends on the radio button selected above Pign ao Upiodd Conngdlalion page Legible Configuration Management The Legible Configuration Management is used to manually manage the configuration on the Quadro This will allow you to download a piece of configuration from the Quadro in the way of legible file to make necessary changes in that file and to upload it back to the same or different Quadro s With this service some pieces of configuration like extension settings NAT settings etc of one Quadro can be used on another Quadro This also helps to apply the same group of settings to the several instances for example to apply the same SIP settings to multiple extensions on the Quadro on the same or different Quadros avoiding manual configuration of each of those instances i e extension from the web management on each of the Quadros The Quadro reseller distributor ISP or carrier usually uses this service The Download current configuration in a legible format link refers to the Configuration Summary page where a partial or complete configuration can be defined and downloaded or viewed The Configuration Summary page is used to generate a piece of legible configuration and to download it to a PC or to view it directly in the browser This page consists of the fo
26. Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled All voice messages default Percentage of System Memory 1 No entries No entries No entries Enabled 100 entries for all type of calls Automatic Downloading of Call Statistics disabled UDP and TCP Port 5060 TSL Port undefined Realm quadro Session Timer disabled DNS Server for SIP default SIP timers RFC 3261 Properties for all Codecs except iLBC Packetization 20ms Silence Suppression yes iLBC properties Packetization 30ms Silence Suppression yes G 726 Standard ITU T specification RTP RTCP port range 6000 6099 RTCP Support disabled Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 118 Quadro Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Parameter System Default Value NAT Traversal for SIP Automatic SIP and RTP Parameters Use STUN SIP TCP Port 5060 STUN Parameters Primary STUN Server stun epygi com Primary STUN Port 3478 Secondary STUN Server undefined Secondary STUN Port undefined Polling Interval 1 hour Keep alive interval 120 seconds NAT IP checking interval 300 seconds No entries in NAT Exclusion table NAT Traversal Settings Onboard Lines Configuration CallerID Standard 2 FSK for all lines Ringer ty
27. Quadro4x 4xi QUadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 67 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide CallBack calls back to the last caller Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro CallBlk blocks the last caller For Aastra phones except the 9133i model a Hard Key Line 4 L4 drop down is available to use the default Hard Key Line 4 of the IP phone for the SLA lines You may select the SLA line to which the Hard Key Line 4 of your Aastra phone will be assigned The Hard Key Line 4 assigned to an SLA line will work exactly the same way like the programmable key does Please Note When saving changes on this page the system asks for a confirmation to remotely reboot the IP phone It is recommended to reboot the IP phone after configuration changes on this page in order to make the new configuration effective on the IP phone IP Phones Templates e The IP Phones Templates is used to create custom templates for the IP Phones The templates contain a set of configuration settings that are uploaded to the IP phone once it is registered on the Quadro With the custom templates the most popular configuration settings may be adjusted accordingly The saved custom templates can be then configured from the Edit IP Line Settings page to be used on the particular IP phone e The IP Phones Templates page consists of a table where the available IP phone templates are listed The systemdefault template in this table indicates the Quadro defau
28. SNMP Settings sssessssnsrnrsrrrrnsrrrrrsrrrrsrrrrrtrrrrtrrrrstrrretnrrr errr rnrn SrArrn PANETE AEENSEAEESEAEEEEAEENESEAEESEAEEEEPAEEEOEEEESEEEEEEEEEEE REENE EEEE 29 BIE Epee ae E E E EE eee eee E E N EEN EN N E E E ee E T E N TTE N E 31 SN ite 00 cae ner rT TTT TTT TTT TTT Terre rere TT TT ee ee ee rere TTT Ter Tre Tree reer tT 31 Aon ae POVI O 2 eee eR en ee enn ene en ee nT E ee ee eT TET ee eer TT ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee 32 gals Ul C e ronee eee ee eer te ee 33 Upload Language Pack Qn nn trr rrs trnto rnrn rnr rSn EESEAEESEAEEEEAEEESAEEESEAEENERAEENSEEENSEAEEEEAEEEE REENE EE Ennt 33 CST RION Manageme NMEeerri clo iinan ANAA EAE AAA AAAA A AEAEE E E E EEEE E Ei En aiai 34 Boere MENO a EEEE EEEE 36 ETOR I N E Eaa a E E EEE EEEE E E 36 User ede sige gies 100 6 9 ae nn nn ARAE ee ee ee ee ee a E 38 PickUp Group Ex ENSIN SeN oer ere er rr nt ee E EEEE EE EEE 42 Call Park SIS TOI Seting etc ee aca oi eh i i e A A E EE E aa aia 43 Paging Group Extension SeN orainen aaar ee A eee er er een tte 43 PAA UM Extension Seting a a sg ste oe eee secs yee seeeueneetdanesiseesdestisseseiens 45 Add Multiple Extensions enn 48 SEEE E e e a E E E E EN E E T E N E A ee et ee N TT 49 CPA a TN OE E E a ee ee ere errr reer TT 49 Upigad Universal Extension ReC rdiNgS see ie heen ee Terre cree et et errr Trt tt Tere TT 50 Receptionist Mala OC Ie WI ec cteetewevsyeseredenseatetesasetetstasebetetatesesareiesuiedeoeaaer EEEE E 50 Extensions Directory A
29. The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FIP In case of FIP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Backup Interval Selection checkboxes are used to select the time interval automatically backup the Quardo s configuration and the voice data The Time based checkbox is used to select the hour when the configuration and the voice data will be automatically backed up on the daily basis Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 19 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Weekday checkbox is used to select the weekday when the configuration and the voice data will be automatically backed up on the weekly basis At least one of these checkboxes needs to be selected Backup Now button is used to perform a manually immediate backup of the system configuration and the voice data The Backup amp Download all config amp voice data link generates a backup file with all configuration settings and user uploaded greeting messages It opens a file chooser window for immediate download to the users PC The Upload amp Restore all config amp voice data link opens a page that has a Browse button which opens a file chooser to select a backed up file and a Configuration to Upload field requiring the file path to upload and to restore it imm
30. Wizard used by the extension s user to setup personal settings the password the voice mail greeting message and the user s name for Extensions Directory from the handset By default the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is enabled when the Quadro s is in the factory reset state It can be manually enabled from this page by pressing the Activate button When the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard is activated the extension s user is prompted to insert personal settings as he she enters his her Voice Mailbox for the first time Unless the required information is not inserted the button is changed to Deactivate and the Configuration Wizard Status becomes Activated Use Deactivate button to stop Voice Mail Configuration Wizard When the user inserted the required information the Configuration Wizard Status on this page is changed to Passed and a Reactivate button appears Using Reactivate button you might re enable the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard so the user will be again prompted about his her personal settings next time entering his her Voice Mailbox Instructions on how to insert the information prompted in the Voice Mail Configuration Wizard are available in the Features Codes see Manual IIl Extension s Users Guide Use External Voice Mail enables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension and is used to define a remote Voice Mail Server as a location for the Voice Mails In this case recorded voice mails will be
31. adding a new record to the displayed table A new page will be displayed to enter any new settings dd fA modifying the settings of the record selected by a checkbox Normally only one 1 record may be selected A new page will be displayed to enter the modified settings Deletes the selected entry s of a table A warning message will ask for confirmation before deleting an existing entry Selecta Selects all table entry s for example for further deletion Inverses opposites an existing selection of table entry s If no entries are selected clicking the button will select all records Inverse Selection May be shown in the upper right corner of a page It displays the number of seconds remaining until the next refresh of the Refresh in page will occur It may be used to reload the page manually Most of the tables offer the option to sort the entries in ascending or descending order by clicking the headings of the columns A small arrow next to the column heading indicates the direction of sorting upward or downward The entries of the table can be selected by using the corresponding checkboxes in order to edit or delete them Entering SIP Addresses Correctly Calls over IP are implemented based on Session Initiating Protocol SIP on the Quadro When making a call to a destination that is somewhere on the Internet a SIP address must be provided SIP addresses needs to be specified in one of the following formats The displa
32. and subnet mask of the specified destination to match with the rule Via IP address requires the IP address of the subsequent router for IP packet forwarding Fig Il 31 Add IP Policy Route page The PPTP L2TP Routes allow IP packets forwarding through the PPTP and L2TP tunnels of the Quadro If PPTP L2TP connections do not exist on Quadro VPN routes cannot be generated The PPTP L2TP Routes table displays all generated VPN routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route e gage Roues WE Pee Montes 27 Rosas enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route eee connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet Maama etea ie where the incoming packets should be routed Via Tunnel for the E yor 460 190 024 PPTPCKant Tousarot 06 Turmat daiten VPN tunnel incoming packets should be routed through and o a a r G Tunnel State for the actual state of the route tunnel up or down a LF 1 Main Syste Users Telephony manet Uplink Network Py gl Paham PPTP L2TP Routes The Add button opens the Add VPN Route page where a new VPN route can be generated Fig Il 32 VPN Routing table The Add VPN Route page offers the following components E pe Ca Tnne Mpa man Route Via contains the available PPTP and L2TP connections on Add VPN Route the Quadro A connection selected from this list will be used to route the IP packet from the Quadro s LAN to the peer be
33. automatic call to the voice mail author This can be used as notification that the recipient has received the voice mail but has not yet played it Call To text field requires the destination s phone number depending on the selected call type For Callback call type no destination s phone number is required e The next two fields are used for retransmission of phone notifications The number of times text field indicates the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If the notification is specified to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field For Callback call type the first notification is sent to the voice mail author after the first expiration of the interval defined in the Repeat every text field For calls with call type different from Callback the first notification will be sent immediately Restore default Notification Message restores the default notification message If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled Upload new Notification Message will show the attached notification file selected by the current extension Please note that a different notification message can be uploaded in case this service serves as a notification to the extension user to inform about the new voice mail received or if it serves as a notification for the voice mail author to be in
34. connections will turn into Connected or Activated if the restart procedure has been successfully completed The first IPSec Connection Wizard page Add IPSec Connection has the Connection Name text field that requires a new mandatory IPSec connection name If the text field is not filled in the error message otherwise an error will occur Error Incorrect connection name will appear Please Note The input in the Connection Name field should only be in Latin characters otherwise an error occurs and IPSec connection cannot be created The Peer type drop down list is used to choose the remote machine type for the IPSec Connection to be established If the list does not include the required type of machine choose Other The VPN Network Topology drop down list allows you to select the location of the peers participating to the VPN connection The following options are present in the list IPSec Configuration Wizard e Quadro lt gt Peer direct connection between Quadro anda peer e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet e Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet through Quadro provider s NAT e Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer connection between Quadro and peer over Internet through peer provider s Fig Il 170 IPSec Connection Wizard Add IPSec Connection NAT Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Q
35. ends After the reboot the Change Extension Length page will disappear and the Extensions Management page will be displayed The Change Extension Length page will not appear again unless the default configuration settings are restored on the device Two types of user extensions active and inactive can be created on the Quadro Active extensions are those that are attached to a line can place and receive calls and use available telephony services Inactive extensions are those that are not attached to the line They can use some available telephony services but they cannot place and receive calls Instead inactive extensions have a voice mailbox available to store the messages from callers Quadro2x has two available lines and up to two active extensions can be established Quadro4x has four available lines and up to four active extensions can be established Quadro16x has sixteen available lines and up to sixteen active extensions can be established Attendant extensions are dedicated to the IVR system on the Quadro These extensions are used by callers to reach Quadro s users and use the remote access and call relay services It is possible to create Auto Attendants with the custom scenarios By default Quadro has one Auto Attendant extension 00 which is undeletable Attention The system is limited to 100 extensions Once the number of extensions in the Extensions table reaches 100 there will be no more possibility to add new extensions Th
36. established call are provided e Authenticated By information about the callers that passed an authentication on the Quadro as configured in the Local AAA Table s Information about FAX statistics for the calls that have a FAX transmission handled It only appears when there was a FAX transmission during the call Clicking on the FAX link in the Details column will move to the FAX Statistics page The Call Detail column is present only in the Unsuccessful Calls table and indicates the reason why the call was unsuccessful Fig Il 109 Call Statistics page The Filter performs a search procedure by the selected criteria The search may be done with several criteria at the same time The Download Call Statistics links are available below all Call Statistics tables and allows you to download the displayed call statistics in a text file Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 58 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide To Enable Disable the Statistics 1 Enter the Call Statistics Settings page Administrator s Menus 2 Select or deselect the Enable Call Reporting checkbox to enable or disable statistics recording 3 If enabling the statistics the maximum number of records to be stored in the statistics table should be selected from the corresponding drop down lists 4 Press Save to apply the new configuration To Filter the Statistics 1 Enter the desired criteria fields 2 Press the Filter button to se
37. extension If the host tone is idle the tone plays a ring splash Snom configuration page contains the following components Dial Plan String indicates a dial plan string used to match dialed digits from the handset to the certain actions e g dialing Dialog Info Call Pickup is used to switch a subscription to the status information of SIP URLs mapped as Destination Extension on the programmable keys Transfer on Onhook is used to switch the call transfer when the handset is placed on hook Call join on Xfer 2 calls when this option is enabled you will connect the newly arrived incoming call to the call on hold by pressing Xfer button When this option is disabled and you press the Xfer button you will have an option to choose the call on hold to transfer the newly arrived incoming call to or to dial a new destination manually Message LED for Dialog State Missed Calls when this option is enabled the phone will indicate missed calls and changing dialog states using the message LED Dialtone during Hold when this option is enabled and the call is held the caller gets dial tone Otherwise there will be no dial tone after pressing Hold Do not Disturb this selection allows you to manipulate with the IP phone DND service When the 72 is selected from this list the DND service of the IP Phone and the DND service of the Quadro for the corresponding extension will be activated when enabling the DND service from
38. flash memory device Please Note Since Quadro allows using both its local flash space and the External USB flash memory device voice data can be stored in both locations depending on the selected Memory Allocation mode If the user experiences a loss of a specific voice mail in their mailbox or an uploaded recorded system message in their configuration verify the memory allocation mode Quadro has been acting in at the time the voice data was recorded The Clear USB Flash button appears only when the USB flash memory device is attached to the Quadro and it is used to clear all existing data on the flash Please Note It is strongly recommended to use one USB flash memory device Two USB flash memory devices cannot be used simultaneously Dial Plan Settings The Dial Plan Settings page is used to adjust the dialing timeout setting The Routing Dial Timeout setting specifies a period of time after the last dialed digit that the system identifies as a completion of dialing If the user does not press any key within the specified timeout the system assumes that the dialing is complete and starts calling the dialed number Only predefined values included in the drop down list can be used Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 90 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus for this setting Main System Uber Telera Internet Liplink Hatwak Dial Plan Settings Fig Il 160 Dial Plan Setti
39. in the Extensions Management table a next subsequent not used extension number will be used instead Please Note Extension cannot start with the digit 0 You can add extensions of up to 20 digits long However the Call Routing won t be adjusted automatically you may need to manually adjust the routing rules for extensions in custom length Main Ssem Users Conlerences Tete kiber re Ligeti Metesurk Extensions Management Add Multiple Extensions Lier Extension 10 Sart From the Extersion 111 Start From the 3 Use Hame 530111 SIF Server sip epygi oom GIF Pon 5060 ly Registration on Si Serve Fig Il 92 Extensions Management Add Multiple Extensions page Start from the SIP User Name text field requires the SIP server registration user name for the first extension to be created Depending on the value in the Quantity text field the next extensions to be created will have subsequent SIP user names For example if you have inserted 30201 in this text field and the Quantity text field contains the value 5 then the 5 newly created extensions will correspondingly have the following registration SIP user names 30201 30202 30203 30204 and 30205 This user name is used for the registration on the SIP Server and should be unique on the SIP server This field length is limited by 20 symbols and is not limited regarding the use of symbols If an extension with the given SIP user name already exists in the Extensions Management ta
40. in the text fields or select a group 7 Insert a Description if needed 8 To add a rule with these parameters press Save To Delete Filtering Rules 1 Select the Filter link to delete a rule from its table The appropriate Filter table will appear in the same window 2 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding rules that should be deleted from the rules table Press Select all if all rules should to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the Filtering Rules page 4 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel by clicking on No Service Pool The Service Pool table is a list of all created services and their parameters It is used to add new services with the appropriate settings protocol type and port range New services can be used to add a restriction or permission by defining a new filtering rule with the following Add opens the Add New Service page where new services may be added Edit opens the Edit Service page where the service parameters except for the service name can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add New Service page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main System Users Tetepercaty himdecivet Uplink Service Pool Configuration Fig Il 184 Service Pool page 102 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s
41. is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the pickup service for the extensions included in the Pickup Group Call Park Extension Settings For Call Park extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings while General Settings page has a different content 1 General Settings for call park extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed or a voice mail is sent Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Password confirm Mam System Users Telephory kher Lipid Metwork Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings 31 Retrieve Timeout text field requires a timeout in minutes during which the parked call will stay active i e the
42. name for the Quadro device Domain Name requires the LAN side domain name which the Quadro belongs to IP Address requires the Quadro host address for the LAN interface Subnet Mask requires the Quadro hosts Subnet Mask The Regional Settings and Preferences are used to select settings specific to the location of the Quadro This is important for the functionality of the voice subsystem The Regional Settings and Preferences page has two drop down lists to select the Location country and a corresponding Timezone Quadro will support Daylight Savings DST correction if it is available for the selected time zone This page also has a manipulation radio button group to choose e System Language selection is available only when the custom Language Pack has been uploaded and it is used to enable custom language for system voice messages or returning back to the default language English GUI Theme selection used to select the GUI theme style of the web based configuration pages e The Choose Theme on Login checkbox indicates whether the GUI theme selection radio buttons should be displayed on the Quadro Login page Selecting the checkbox will allow users to choose the GUI theme before logging into the Quadro Leaving the checkbox unselected will require the administrator to run the System Configuration Wizard to change the theme The Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings are used to configure the emergency di
43. read Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Internet connection status static IP Please check your pending events Copyright C 2005 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserves Fig Il 39 Event Warning on the Main Menu page 22 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Ham Syriam Uber Telephony Internet Uplink Heiwnik epysi hid eron System Events Sman Eves Event Sethe Lumen Srl Mii Mon Bip 26155759 7005 Dalsie piak ofan ios Ginable LEE Select oll penne Salacija Bits Teeter Pulled ity Appts ambled Hat The System Events table is the list of new and read system events System events have corresponding coloring depending on the nature of the event success priority 1 color green low importance failure priority 2 color yellow critical failure priority 3 color red The table shows the Status of the event new or read as well as the name of the application the event refers to event description and the date when the event was received For example if the event was caused by the IDS service the Check IDS link appears in the reference row that will lead to the IDS Log page or if the event has occurred due to incorrect mail sending or SIP registration the corresponding links will be seen in the Reference column of the table The administrator can view the detailed log for each event that has occurred The System Events page offer
44. recorded are defective the Licensor will replace the media without charge as long as the original media are returned to the Licensor with satisfactory proof of purchase and date of purchase within the Warranty Period This warranty is limited to you as the licensee and is not transferable The foregoing warranty does not extend to any Licensed Materials that have been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED ABOVE THE LICENSOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE OR WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS DEFECTS OMISSIONS INACCURACIES FAILURES DELAYS OR INTERRUPTIONS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LACK OF VIRUSES AND ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR NON INFRINGEMENT THE ENTIRE RISK ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS REMAINS WITH YOU 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR OTHER PECUNIARY
45. requires the STUN server port number The Secondary STUN Server and Secondary STUN Port text fields respectively require the parameters of the secondary STUN server The Polling Interval drop down list contains the possible time intervals between referrals to the STUN server The Keep alive interval text field provides the options to select the time interval in seconds for keeping NAT mapping alive The value should be in the range of 10 to 300 seconds Man Stem Users Telephony eer eed Ue NAT Traversal Settings i ALP Peers Fig Il 118 RTP Parameters page Mam System Users Telephony BAe Upir Network NAT Traversal Settings STUN P ramotors Fig Il 119 STUN Parameters page The NAT IP checking interval text field indicates the interval in seconds between the NAT IP checking attempts used to distinguish the possible NAT IP address changes and to perform registration on the new host The value should be in the range of 10 to 3600 The NAT Exclusion Table page includes a table where all possible IP ranges are listed that allows you to exclude some network addresses from being NATed For example if a Quadro user needs to make SIP calls within the local network as well as outside of that network all local IP addresses are required to be excluded from NAT traversal settings by being listed in this table Otherwise a malfunction may occur in SIP operations The NAT Exclusion Table page offers the following i
46. requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the call statistics files in The Send Method manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the remote server type TFTP or FTP In case of FTP selection the authentication username and the password need to be inserted In case these fields are left empty anonymous authentication will be used The Download Now bution is used to perform a manually immediate download of the call statistics The Number of Records displays the current number of statistics entries in the table For successful calls Total Duration Maximum Duration Average Duration and Minimum Duration statistics are displayed on top of the table The Call Statistics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls pages consist of the general information on successful missed and unsuccessful calls search fields and the calls table The search components are as follows From and To text fields are used to search by date and time The data must be entered in either of the following formats dd mm yyyy hh mm ss or dd Mon yyyy hh mm ss The time criteria are optional From requires an earlier date and time than the To field If the entered data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal date should be less than maximal date prevents statistics filtering From and To drop down lists are used to search by duration The duration has to be
47. saving it to the Extensions Directory table Call to drop down list contains all extensions on the Quadro that should ring when selecting the specified Name Description can be used for any optional information requiring entry in the Extensions Directory Please Note The entries in the Extensions Directory can automatically be deleted if the extensions assigned to the entries are removed from the Extensions Management table Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database page is used to create a list of trusted external phones If they are part of the Quadro Authorized Phones database external SIP or PSTN then users are free to access the Quadro Auto Attendant services without requiring authentication When adding a trusted phone to the list an existing extension has to be chosen The parameters extension number and password as well as SIP and Speed Calling Settings will be used automatically for the trusted caller access of the Quadro Auto Attendant A direct connection to the Call Relay menu can be optionally provided M n Seton Uses leben Meet ee Up Metin h The Authorized Phones Database page displays the Authorized Phones Database Authorized Phones Database table where the trusted phones are listed Only SIP and PSTN users can be added to the Authorized Phones Database The Authorized Phones Database table displays all trusted callers with their settings For example the call type caller address extension they automa
48. selected if no authentication parameters to be provided Firewall and NAT The Firewall Configuration page allows setting up a firewall configuring the security level and enabling the NAT and IDS services of Quadro A Firewall is a security service configured by the Quadro administrator based on various criteria The firewall allows or blocks traffic based on policies services and or IP addresses The firewall has several levels of security policies low medium or high The administrator may add additional service based rules Filtering rules will take effect only if the Firewall has been enabled and are independent from the selected firewall security level NAT Network Address Translation is used to allow Quadro LAN members to connect to the Internet using Quadro s WAN IP address The Quadro NAT also handles forwarding incoming packets from the WAN to the PCs or devices on Quadro s LAN The IDS Intrusion Detection System is a type of firewall but together with deleting dangerous packets or packets containing intrusion attacks IDS generates a log file with information about these dropped packets and the senders responsible for those packets The log can be viewed on the IDS Log page and notifications about them can be sent to the user in various ways such as e mail flashing LED and display notification Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 99 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus T
49. server port is not specified Quadro will access the SIP server through the default port 5060 Registration on SIP Server enables the SIP server registration option If the extension has already been registered on an SIP server its IP address will be displayed in brackets Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 38 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus 3 SIP Advanced Settings This group is used to configure advanced SIP settings Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server settings and to define other SIP server specific settings The SIP Outbound proxy is an SIP server where all the SIP requests and other SIP messages are transferred Some SIP servers use an outbound proxy server to escape restrictions of NAT For example Free World Dialup service uses an Outbound Proxy server If an Outbound proxy is specified for an extension all SIP calls originating from that extension are made through that outbound proxy i e all requests are sent to that outbound proxy even those made by Speed Calling The Secondary SIP Server acts as an alternative SIP registration server when the primary SIP Registration Server is inaccessible If the connection with the primary SIP server fails Quadro will automatically start sending SIP messages to the Secondary SIP Server It will switch back to the primary SIP server as soon as the connection is reestablished Aut
50. terface tee Conerectenn ure options any active traffic on the channel s will be terminated Tuk Use TAT ETR Thank 2 Jaer ODI with PTMP Point To Multi Pow The Copy to Trunk s functional link displays a page used to gt Tae PTP Point To Point ZDN foe choose a trunk to which selected trunk s settings should be C map copied to The Restore Default Settings functional link restores the i Fig Il 133 ISDN Setti default signaling settings of the selected ISDN trunk s ig ettings page Clicking on the corresponding ISDN trunk will lead to the ISDN wizard where trunk s ISDN signaling settings can be configured The ISDN Wizard consists of several pages The ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings allows you to choose the interface type and the connection type of the selected trunk s The Interface Type drop down list allows you to select between the User and the Network interfaces If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the CO then User interface type should be selected If the ISDN port of the Quadro is connected to the PBX then Network interface type should be selected in that case Quadro acts as a CO for that PBX Please note By default only User mode is available in the Interface Type drop down list To activate Network mode on Quadroe2xi 4xi 16xi enable the Network mode support on the ISDN Network Mode hidden page To access the page type isdnnetworkmode cgi in the browser s address bar The Connection Type manip
51. the CallerID on ISDN is sent with the value from the P Asserted Identity field otherwise the CallerID on ISDN is sent with the value from the From field For the calls from ISDN to SIP if the incoming CallerlD from the ISDN network contains a restricted flag then the P Asserted Identity field in the Invite SIP message contains the restricted CallerlD and the From field contains anonymous When the Send Calling Party Subaddress checkbox is selected Quadro will send the extension number as subaddress and the value defined in the Default outgoing Caller ID field as caller ID on the outgoing call When this checkbox is disabled no subaddress information will be sent and the caller ID will be defined according to the selection of the Use Default Outgoing Caller ID checkbox see above Caller ID information along with the Subaddress can be displayed on the phone display depending on the phone and PBX settings and capabilities The B1 Channel and B2 Channel checkboxes enables disables timeslots for voice transfer Disabling the timeslot will prevent both incoming and Outgoing calls Clicking on the ISDN Stats link will open the ISDN Status page that displays ISDN traffic statistics on the corresponding ISDN trunk The ISDN Stats link is displayed for every active trunk on the board and refers to the page where ISDN trunk and traffic statistics can be viewed The ISDN Trunk Status page provides the following information about the selected trunk
52. the Quadro Packet Filter The Outgoing Traffic filter is for outgoing traffic The rules here allow or deny Quadro s LAN users to reach external services Management Access is used to enable management access to the Quadro from the Internet A host on the Internet can be allowed to reach the Quadro Call Control Access is used to enable the access from the call controlling application from the Internet to the Quadro The call controlling applications can be used to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro Fig Il 182 Filtering Rules page SIP Access is to allow or deny the SIP access to or from the particular SIP servers SIP hosts or a group of them The SIP Access filtering rule may prevent or allow incoming or outgoing SIP calls to or from specified SIP server s or host s When Blocked IP List is used traffic from specific hosts may be blocked no matter what services are opened in the other filters NO traffic will be allowed to the specified hosts The Blocked IP List service has a higher priority if the same host is also listed in the Allowed IP List table Allowed IP List allows trusted hosts to reach your network and vice versa It is an exception to other rules and only all services may be allowed for a single host Restricted IPSec Generally hosts in a VPN are allowed to have access to any service i e no traffic will be blocked They are treate
53. the following components Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in the Quadro s LAN MAC Address text fields require the MAC address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Static IP Address text fields require a fixed IP address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Please Note If you leave this field empty the device in the Quadro s LAN will get the first available IP address from range defined in the DHCP Settings page see above Mam Syehem Uber Telephony Irterrret Upird Helori DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Add Host quadrols F 132 t n 7 218 Clipboard Back Fig Il 199 Static MAC address binding Add Host page View DHCP Leases leads to the page where the DHCP leased LAN IP addresses are listed The DHCP Leases page includes a list of the leased host addresses that are part of the Quadro s LAN For these hosts Quadro acts as a server supplying them with a unique IP address It displays a read only table describing all the leased IP hosts and their parameters The table contains the following columns IP address host IP address assigned by Quadro MAC address host MAC address provided by the host itself Lease Start date and time when the leased IP address has been activated Lease End date and time when the leased IP address has been or will be deactivated Binding State indicates the state of the DHCP lease Hostname hostname provided by the host its
54. the following components The Old Password text field is only present when modifying the Administrator account password and requires the current password of the Administrator An error message prevents entering the wrong password The New Password text field requires a new password for the Administrator or Local Administrator Reentering the new password in the Confirm New Password text field will confirm the new password The password can consist of numerical values only Up to 20 digits are allowed A corresponding warning appears if any other symbols are inserted Mam Syren Wheres Telephony Irterrret lpini Change Password Account Name admin Administrator s Menus Fig Il 64 Change Password page The Enable User and Disabled User functional buttons are used to enable or disable the Local Administrator s account Please Note The Administrators account cannot be disabled The Roles page contains a table where the Local Administrator and Extensions users are listed This page allows you to set the permissions to the GUI pages for each user in the table The Edit functional button leads to the Change Access Rights page where a list of user specific GUI pages is displayed Select the user in the table and press Edit to manage the permission for the corresponding user On the Change Access Rights page Grant Access Deny Access functional buttons are used to grant or deny access to certain GUI page s for the selected
55. the level of voice transmitted from Quadro to the PSTN ISDN network Receive Gain defines the volume of voice received by Quadro from the PSTN ISDN network For Voice Mail Mam System Users Gain Control Restore Default Gains Line 1 Transmit Gain Recetve Gainc Line 3J Transm Gain Receive Gainc FXO 1 Transmit Gain D Receive Gainc Line 2 Transmit Gainc Recetve Gait Line 4 rasmtianc 5 Receive Gai FRO 2 Transma Gaie D Receive Gain Administrator s Menus Recording Gain defines the volume of the phone microphone upon playing voice mails or system messages Voice Maa Recording Gant 0 Playback Gain defines the phone speaker volume upon playing voice mails or system messages Piayheck ac The Gain Control page offers Transmit Gain and Receive Gain drop down lists for each line that contains allowed gain i i Fig Il 141 Gain Control page values which can be set up by the administrator for every line Please Note If the gain control has been configured incorrectly DIMF digits may not be properly recognized Gain control settings are strictly dependent on the location country of Quadro and the phone type If a private PBX is attached to the FXO port on the Quadro the voice level in the handset of the phone connected to the Quadro FXS port may be too loud depending on the PBX type and configuration This can be adjusted by decreasing the FXO Receive Gain to three o
56. those without Criterion 1 The patterns with Criterion 1 The list split into two subgroups 2271 123 1 3 100 150 asd 1 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 Step 2 The two groups of patterns are arranged separately from each other by the total number of matching digits inside and outside the braces brackets in the descending order Criterion 2 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Criterion 2 The list of patterns Matching digits N The list of patterns Matching digits 123 1 1 3 3 0 8 4 1 1231 4 1 3 100 150 asd 1 4 a ae 100 150 asd VV ee ECs nn i i i gt j A 1231 123 3 11 15 3 i a a SS aa Step 3 The new sub lists are arranged separately from each other by the number of matching digits outside the braces brackets Criterion 3 The patterns that contain the same number of matching digits are grouped into sub lists Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 86 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Criterion 3 Administrator s Menus The list of patterns Matching digits 2 1 1 3 3 0 8 1231 4 100 150 asd 1 1 2 1 12 31 Se 123 3 11 15 3 1 0 O 1 3 lt lt O or Oo 0 The list of patterns Matching digits 4 1231 1 1 3 3 0 8 100 150 asd 1 221 12 31 nO 2 3 bal li 1 SS T
57. to the IP lines or remote extension e calls from an external user are routed to another external user through Quadro s routing rules In the first case RTP statistics will be logged if remote extension or IP line user is calling locally to the Quadro s extension or auto attendant The Configure Call Quality Event Notification link leads to the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page where call quality control notification specifics can be configured From the Configure Call Quality Event Notification page you may configure event notification policy when the call quality is lower than the allowed level This page consists of a Notify checkbox which enables the call quality monitoring mechanism for the corresponding event notifications and a Call Quality less than drop down list where the least satisfactory call quality should be selected When a call with the quality less than the level selected here is registered on the Quadro an event notification will appear When the Notify checkbox is disabled no Call Quality events will occur on the Quadro Main System Users Telepheey Waernet Uplink Metwoak Configure Call Quality Event Notification Ca Save a Please Note The ways of notification for the Call Quality events f Fig Il 111 Configure Call Quality Event Notification page should be configured from the Events page The Configure System Events link leads to the Events page where the methods of notificatio
58. user When access to a certain GUI page is denied for a user the You are not authorized to access this page warning message will be displayed Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main Syaten Users 9 Telepheery hemor niet pink User Rights Management Main Syeren Users Telepteery imene Lp nh OETI User Rights Management Changing att ess rights for role extensions aihcceg Selec Where Selection pysi Fig Il 65 Roles page at User Rights Management opysi Fig Il 66 Edit Roles page at User Rights Management 35 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Users Menu Man Sym eens Tebeqdeotny Sdtecnet Uptewd Maoh Receshonia Managemert Quad rod Sissons Dracs Active Calls wie Calta Phone Caled Phone Fig Il 67 Telephone Users Menu in Dynamo Theme F Fig Il 68 Telephone Users Menu in Plain Theme Extensions Management The Extensions Management page is used to create a variety of extensions and auto attendants on the Quadro From this page by clicking on the user extension the Administrator can go to the extension settings pages Main System Users Telephony intermit Uplink Hetwork When this page is accessed for the first time after the Choose Extensions Length Quadro s initial boot up or the default configuration settings restore an intermediate page is displayed The Change Extension Length page is used to define the exte
59. will allow always being online in the network e IP Address Assignment radio buttons are used to define the IP address assignment for the PPP interface with the following options e Dynamic IP Address the IP address to the PPP interface will be assigned dynamically by the DHCP server e Fixed IP Address the fixed user defined IP address will be assigned to the PPP interface Man System Users Telephony aternet Upank Network The Keep Connection alive checkbox enables keeping the connection alive by sending control packets dedicated for the link state verification Fig Il 166 PPP Dial Settings page Advanced PPP Settings The Advanced PPP Settings are used to enable disable certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment These settings are available only if Quadro has a PPPoE WAN interface Attention Disabling any of the services below may cause problems when establishing a connection including the complete connection failure The default settings should be changed only if the ISP Internet Service Provider specifically requires it or if the peer system has problems with one of the services listed below More information about these services can be found at http www protocols com pbook ppp htm Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 92 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Advanced PPP Settings page offers the following group of che
60. 0 0 0 0 used before The checkbox should be enabled if the remote party does not recognize hold requests initiated from the Quadro ve eak Fig Il 74 Extensions Management Edit Entry Advanced SIP Settings page A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively require the host address IP address or the host name and the port numbers of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers 4 Remote Settings This group is used to configure SIP Remote Extension functionality This is an advanced telephony feature that allows Quadro users to remotely operate Quadro Users need to register a hardware or software SIP phone on the Quadro by defining the Quadro s global IP address and an appropriate Username Password A registered SIP Remote phone can act fully as a phone connected locally to Quadro i e it can use Quadro s PBX features place and receive calls access voice mails etc The Enable checkbox activates the SIP Remote Extension s functionality Please Note SIP Remote Extension functionality may be enabled only for active attached to an onboard FXS or IP line extensions Identification parameters used by the remote SIP device for registration on the Quadro should be defined in the Username and Password text fields When the Enable RTP Proxy checkbox i
61. 3 Select an action type from the Action radio buttons to notify the administrator about the event 4 Press the Save button to submit the changes or use Back to abort the selected action Time Date Settings The Time and Date Settings page provides information about the current system time and date The settings may be updated through the international time and date servers Time is used to set the local time hour minute Date is used to set the date month day year Enable Simple Network Time Protocol Server enables the SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol server on Quadro thus Quadro becomes the timeserver for its LAN Enable Simple Network Time Protocol Client enables the Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Wetwork epysi SNTP client on the Quadro thus Quadro becomes a client to an o external timeserver A checkbox disables Date and Time drop Time Date Settings down lists and enables the following parameters The SNTP Servers table lists all defined NTP Servers The Add functional button opens an Add NTP Server page where a new NTP server can be defined This page offers the NTP Server radio buttons that are used to choose between a manual and a predefined NTP server Manual requires the NTP servers FQDN Full Qualified Domain Name or its IP address sae Bark Predefined is used to select the NTP servers host address from the drop down list where the most common NTP servers are listed Fig Il 43 T
62. AAA Table Add Entry page 38 or 45 to match the pattern Authorization by Login this selection is used to set the authentication based on the username and password inserted by the user upon login The Username text field requires the authentication username Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect Username digits allowed only will appear The Password text field requires the authentication password Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Incorrect Password digits allowed only will appear The Expiration Date and Time drop down lists are used to set the date and time when the registration will expire The Expires in checkbox is used to enable the Expiration Date and Time feature The Description text field requires an optional description about the calling party To create a new Call Routing rule ae wee ee 23 24 Click on the Call Routing Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Call Routing page Enable the newly routing rule if you wish it to be active after creation Specify the Pattern in the corresponding field Select the Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix if required Provide Suffix if needed Select the Call Type from the drop down list Define the Metric or leave the default Enter a Description if needed Enable the Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller ID checkbox if the route
63. Clicking on the needed link will display the log on the right side of the page Back The text field on the left side is dedicated for support personnel only and is used to search a custom log not listed on this page To do so insert a required log name to the text field and press Show Custom Log functional button Caprigh Cp S007 Erva Tabadia Lid Al ago eed Fig Il 58 System Logs View System Logs page Automatic Provisioning Automatic Provisioning provides the possibility to automatically configure the WAN network settings of Quadro This is very useful when the administrator is not actually aware about the Quadro s Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepyzi network settings Automatic Provisioning automatically detects TQuadra225 the matching network configuration settings applies them on the Automatic Provisioning Quadro thus connecting the device to the internet through the available ISP connection Please Note Automatic Provisioning can only be run from the Start AutoProvsioning LAN side of the Quadro i e from the PC connected to the STS ECT GET oT Quadro s LAN Welcome to automatic provisioning z a i Checking physical link of WAN interface Automatic Provisioning automatically detects and configures the Checking for physical link WAN link ok following settings on the Quadro Warning The system will reconfigure itself The current internet connection setup parameters will be lost Do you reall
64. DS text field requires the number of digits that should be discarded from the beginning of the Inbound Caller Pattern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear The Prefix text field requires entering the symbols alohanumerics and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the Inbound Caller Pattern instead of the discarded digits For example if the routing pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the prefix digits are 909 the final phone number will be 909345 Wildcards are allowed here see chapter Entering SIP Addresses Correctly The Discard Non Numeric Symbols checkbox is used to discard any non numeric symbols from the Inbound Caller Pattern Fig Il 151 Call Routing Wizard page 3 The Display Name text field allows you to replace an original caller s ID with the custom display name for the corresponding routing rule This field is optional and when it is left empty an original caller ID will be displayed on the called destination s phone otherwise the name inserted here will appear on the phone This field is not available for PBX Voicemail call type routing rules The Remove Display Name checkbox is used to remove caller IDs from calls made with this routing rule This field is not available for PB
65. E EEE NA 9 EAE o AAAA EEAS AEE EA EA EAEE EAA EN EA ee ee ee ee re el el re ret E EANNA AENEA IA ANAA 11 C ENO AiE E T E N T E N E E E E E ee E E E re 11 PERNO SU a ne nn eer nn eT rT errr rr er err er ret en ee re ere re reer TT Tt 11 UNS SU CS nacho ce taev cane seesaaueecessqeuuecsseausaueeeeuasuneeensuauaeentececauesocsucseescescesyapececceae socecowaiccisene ces seeseeeeceaeseeoteenesee 13 MemMOR o es 00 eee terrane eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee errr errr errr rere 15 Hardware StatuS sssssseresssrrrrsrrrrsrrrretnrrrt rriro t rrr etr rrt tnr rr erro rrErSENEEEEAEEESEAEESEAEEEEAEENOAEEESEAEESEEAEEEE EEES EAEEEEAEEEE REENE EE nnnt 16 SIP REOSE NON S U e ANA A AEAEE E EEE EEE EEEE EE E EEE E E N E AAAA AAAA 16 IP Lines Registrahon SACU Sica care vecaxe ve errana EENEN EEEE EEA EREKE EEEE EANES EEEE 16 MSS E E E E E E ETETETT EEEIEE EEE ETE E E sees 17 IE ROUN OT U eea aaa a a en eee re ee 17 Segi ere EAEE E E E E en ne ee E E E E E E E ee ee ee 19 PUTT Oi FWN Tre U E A EE NEE AAA ETE E EE EAEE EEE 20 Legible Configuration Management ssssssssrsssrrererrrrerrrrrsrrrrernrrotnrrrttrrr etr rro rnr ESSE DEES EEE rrr rr rnnr an rrru SESE SEER SSS EEE EE EGGS 21 TE S A oer PN EE E O E T E E EEE EEE 22 Hme Date SERING S eredera E A EEE EE ee re een 25 eli E E E EE ee ee 26 EIN ae ES e AA E E E E T A A E A E E E EE co caaasosseecaasoooeseae 26 RAW are UPa e E T A ATE T 27 eieleld ino TOO cen E EE E E EE E EEE AEA A A E EE EE E ee 28
66. Fig Il 21 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics page Man Syve Users Tedephory heene Upin Niet pened Ep Si ISDN Channel Usage Statistics hu 1 Shiti Wei Show button is used to generate an ISDN channels usage diagram chart over the parameters selected above When this button is pressed ISDN Channel Usage Statistics chart appears It represents dependency between the time frame and the number of calls performed during that period Additionally it may display the maximum number of calls performed in the selected time frame Fig Il 22 ISDN Channel Usage Statistics chart Memory Status Main tyster Usera Telephony menet Uplink hebak Quadro Status Memory Status The Memory Status page includes tables with the available User Space information for each extension These tables display the space used by the voice mailbox and uploaded recorded system greetings It shows the free and total space counted in minutes seconds for every extension This page includes the following information SF Fea stagon Status E Lines Fogtstra bon Giaur ans Ab alk SE eS Memory Size shows total memory space counted in minutes seconds available on the Quadro and assigned to all extensions The table s links lead the administrator to the extension settings page where User Space may be altered The System Memory row indicates the space occupied by the universal extension recordings Link refers to the Upload Universal Extension Recordings
67. IP Lines table lists the IP lines and remote extensions registered on the Quadro The table indicates the actual IP addresses of the remote devices the usernames by which the devices have been registered on the Quadro as well as the registration status information The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices and SIP Tunnels to Master Devices tables list the SIP tunnels between local and the remote Quadros see SIP Tunnel Settings The SIP Tunnels to Slave Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a master The SIP Tunnels to Master Devices table lists those tunnels where local Quadro acts as a slave IP Lines Registration Status The IP Lines Registration Status displays a table with the IP Lines registration information on the Quadro The table lists the IP lines and remote extensions registered on the Quadro The table indicates the actual IP addresses of the remote devices the usernames by which the devices have been registered on the Quadro as well as the registration status information Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus km Sabem ihen lallo rol ea ceed Arbin Haah Quadro Status Hardware Status LAM Lotter reed Fiili Felei inet bret Ha jama Saati FEA Fig Il 24 Hardware Status page Man Syitem Users Teteptronny bernat pare Metercah Quadro Status SIP Registration Status Regul tien om SIP Servers talcum Be SP Hehi than Statens Detect
68. IP Phone This option is recommended When keyeventF_DND is selected only DND service of the phone will be activated when enabling the DND Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 68 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide e Record Missed Calls when this option is selected the information about the missed calls will be displayed on the IP Phone Any parameters not listed above or parameters defined in this page for other IP phone models can be found in the users manual of the corresponding IP phone Please Note Save changes before moving among the configuration pages I P Phones Logo e The IP Phones Logo page is used to upload a custom logo for the IP Phones This page contains only those IP phones for which Quadro supports the custom logo upload The uploaded custom logo will be visible on the display of the IP phone IP Phones Logo Man Sem hers Tapy acu e The Enable checkbox is used to enable the custom maw logo for the selected IP phone model s anama The Browse button opens the file chooser to select the Fig Il 129 IP Phones Logo custom logo file g g Loopback Settings The FXS Lines Loopback Settings page is used to configure the lines for voice loopback diagnostics When loopback is enabled on the line any incoming calls to the corresponding line will automatically pick up on the first ring and any voice towards the line will automatically b
69. Il 176 PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 2 Please Note These authentication settings should be identically configured on both peers for the successful connection establishment Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 97 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The manipulation radio buttons selection on this page allows you to choose whether the new connection will be a client or a server For the Client radio button selection no further details need to be provided For the Server radio button selection the following information needs to be provided The Server IP Address text fields require the IP address of the server The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are only present if the Connection Type selected on the previous page is PPTP They are used to select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables the Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected The Start functional button initiates the selected connection s If it is a client connection then this button initiates a client activity of reaching the server The Start option is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time The Stop functional button is used to stop the selected connection s Stopping the server connection will disconnect all connected clients and close the PPTP L2TP tunnel The Stop option
70. LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED MATERIALS EVEN IF THE LICENSOR OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES YOU AGREE THAT YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S ENTIRE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSED MATERIALS SHALL BE AS SET FORTH HEREIN AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR S OR SUCH OTHER PARTY S LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR LOSS TO YOU EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE LICENSE MATERIALS The foregoing limitation exclusion and disclaimers apply to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 123 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement 9 10 11 12 13 14 Compliance With Laws You may not use the Licensed Materials for any illegal purpose or in any manner that violates applicable domestic or foreign law You are responsible for compliance with all domestic and foreign laws governing Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP calls U S Government Restricted Rights The Licensed Materials are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 C F R section 52 227 19 or subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252
71. Management Edit Entry Voice Mailbox Settings page For each of these selections it is required to enter the SIP URI of the Voice Mail Server where voice mails of the corresponding extension will be collected Attention By choosing the Use External Voice Mail option some internal voice mailbox services may become unavailable Instead the services of the external voice mail server will become available to the user Please consult with the external voice mail server administrator before enabling this option The Transport Protocol for SIP messages radio buttons allow the transport protocol UDP or TCP for transmission of SIP messages to be selected 7 Licensing This page is only available if the corresponding licensing is enabled from the Features page This group allows you to configure the extension to be used by the Quadro Communication Manager QCM soft phone application The page contains Enable QCM Quadro Communication Manager license checkbox which allows you to set the corresponding extension to be used by the QCM application When the checkbox is not selected on this page the QCM will be functional with the extension only during trial period Please Note This checkbox can be simultaneously selected on as many extensions as QCM licenses are available on the Quadro Mam System Users tejephory P ernet Upiee Wetworh Extensions Management Edit Entry License Settings 11 Enable OCM Quadro Comrmunt
72. Management page Add opens the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard where the new receptionist phone can be created and configured The wizard consists of several pages The Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard IP Phone Main System Users Telephony interteet Uptink Hetwork Model page has the following components Ra Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Description text field requires the description of the receptionist to be configured IP Phone Model The Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist Oescription Epygi Receptionist Phone ie Shim so w The MAC Address text fields require the MAC Address of the MAC Adimas corresponding IP phone aAmached IP Linis El Wee Seagion Timer Based on the selected IP phone model and the inserted MAC Address the IP phone can be automatically configured by simple reset reboot for more information about IP phone configuration refer to the corresponding IP phone s users manual Elusa Mickbaek The Attached IP Lines text field requires the numbers of Quadro s IP lines used by the receptionist The IP lines should be separated by commas Fig Il 96 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Phone Model Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 51 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Use Session Timer enables the SIP session timer for the IP lines specified
73. N Trunk functional buttons are used to navigate through the information regarding other lines The Lines Status table displayed for FXS and IP lines includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters only appear when an event takes place on the extension Static Parameters Man System Usas Tebepetentey Setnet Lint Mond Extension shows the extension number of the selected telephone line Quadro Status Lines Status Display Name shows the corresponding name Phone State may have the value On Hook or Off Hook For IP Line Status this field may additionally have Not Configured and Temporary Offline values Lihet States Number of Active Calls shows the number of calls that are currently present on the phone Dynamic Parameters Call State shows the current state of the extension in voice mail in call waiting busy call out ring in etc Caller Party appears when a call is received and indicates the caller extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Called Party appears when a call is placed and indicates the destination extension and the IP address or a phone number depending on type of call Call Type shows whether the call is Internal or External and whether it Fig Il 15 Lines Status Lines Status page upon established call is a PSTN call PBX call or IP call Call Start Time shows the call start date and time Call Du
74. N and Manual NAT traversal connection for the RTP traffic and to define the RTP RTCP ports for the connection over NAT Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of connection over NAT Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 62 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of Mapped settings for the RTP UDP traffic over NAT STUN settings are configured on the STUN Parameters page see below Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the RTP RTCP port ranges for the RTP traffic over NAT e The Mapped Host text fields require the Mapped Host for RTP traffic over NAT e Mapped RTP RTCP Port Range e Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed e Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed Please Note RIP RTCP Mapped Port ranges should be greater than or equal to the RTP RTCP port ranges defined on the RTP Settings page The STUN Parameters page enables automatic NAT configuration through the STUN server and is used to configure the STUN Simple Traversal of UDP over NAT client on the Quadro This page requires the following data to be inserted The STUN Server text field requires the STUN servers hostname or IP address The STUN Port text field
75. Note Changing a group name will also change the references to this group including groups where this group is a IP Pool Configuration Add Group member of and all affected filter rules enabled and disabled ones in all chains Deleting a group will also delete any reference to the corresponding group including filter rules and member relations to the other groups Clicking on the Group name will display an IP Pool Group Configuration page with the Members list for the current group Chatamup memesi of my CAM arm ft Back Fig Il 187 IP Pool configuration Add Group page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 103 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The IP Pool Group Configuration page displays a list of all the added member IP addresses for the selected group It offers the following components Current Group provides read only information about the current group name the members are listed for Add opens the Add Member page where a new member may be added Edit opens the Edit Members page where the service parameters can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add Member page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear The Add Members page provides the following radio buttons IPaddress requires the member IP address that is to be added to the group IP Subnet requires th
76. P address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address To text fields Press the Save button to make the policy route with these settings ol dd ad al To Add a VPN Route Select the VPN Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the VPN Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the VPN connection from the Route Via drop down list Enter the destination IP address and the subnet mask into the Route To text fields Press the Save button to make the VPN route with these settings all dl toa Configuration Management The Configuration Management page assists the administrator with managing the system configuration settings and voice data For example the administrator is able to backup and download the settings to a PC and then upload and restore them back to the Quadro Additionally this page provides the possibility of restoring the factory default configuration settings Mai System Users Teleplmery hited net Uplink Met wortk Configuration Management Rachup 4 Aitoaatic ally Dowrtond a ofa amp yotce data The Backup amp Automatically Download all config amp voice data link leads to the Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page where the automatic backup of the system configuration and the voice data can be configured The service allows you to setup Quadro so it will automatically backup the system configuration and the voice data and store it in the sp
77. P phone If you are running older firmware on your SIP phone this service will automatically download and install the newer firmware on your SIP phone Please Note The Firmware Version Control service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below Attention Do not select this checkbox if you wish to run other firmware version on your SIP phone than the one compatible with the Quadro The alternating Hide disabled IP lines and Show disabled IP lines buttons are used to respectively hide or show the IP lines that have not been activated with a feature key To enable the lines install a feature key from the Features page The Manage IP Phones Templates link takes to the IP Phones Templates page where custom IP phone templates may be created The Upload IP Phones Logo link takes to the IP Phones Logo page where custom logo for the IP phone may be uploaded The IP Lines table lists all available IP lines with additional information about each of them number of the extension attached to it information about the phone type and the configuration details e Each column heading in the tables is link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading By pressing on the IP line link in the Available IP Lines column the Edit IP Line page specific for the current IP line is opened This page offers a grou
78. P server It contains a table where a list of default DHCP server options is already defined Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 107 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide More options can be added from this page as well as settings of the existing options can be modified All options in the table on this page are then sent to the DHCP clients The following functional buttons are available Add opens a page Add Entry page where a new DHCP server option can be defined The Add Entry page contains a group of manipulation radio buttons to select between the predefined DHCP server options or to define your own DHCP server option e Predefined this selection allows you to select from the predefined DHCP server options e The Option Name drop down list contains the most common DHCP server options e The Option Value text field requires the value for the selected option The type and format of the value inserted in this field is dependent on the option selected from the Option Name drop down list Custom this selection allows you to define a new DHCP server options The following parameters are required to be inserted for a new option e The Option Code text field is used to insert a code of the option It may have values in a range from 0 to 255 Administrator s Menus i epygi Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network r O D Quadro DHCP Advanced Settings Add Edit Delete S
79. PS number 186 from NIST SHA is an improved variant of MD4 producing a 160 bit hash SHA and MD5 are the message digest algorithms available in IPSEC e MD5 Message Digest is a hash algorithm that makes a checksum over the messages The checksum is sent with the data and enables the receiver to notice whether the data has been altered The Diffie Hellman parameter is used to determine the length of the base prime numbers used during the key exchange process The cryptographic strength of any key derived depends in part on the strength of the Diffie Hellman group which is based upon the prime numbers The higher is the group bit rate the better is encryption If mismatched groups are specified on each peer negotiation fails The third page of the IPSec Connection wizard Automatic Keying is used to setup a type of password Shared Secret or the RSA public key to secure your IPSec Connection The functionality of Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS can be added to both Following ways of automatic keying are available e Shared Secret is a type of password consisting of any characters that both of the IPSec Connection partners must know The authentication will be done with this shared secret All encryption functions below will remain concealed Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 95 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note It is also not recommended to start multiple road warrio
80. QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main Sysiem Uses Telephony inernet Uplink Network Upload Language Pack mestalla OF Peden language Pace weil Coe Arebool Ate Que pE eos Ihe disang ond Losing ail nherdily Hoted vote Mais and Gaston voids messages Losing call statistics Ltt pining viii Losing he bansler slashes Curent language pack Language pack Al toupload Mena Fiadimapes AeeaseBuleLangPackisl Bees LAE ne EE a eE a h ATTENTION Aner prassing Save youll have to reboot tie device manually even if you don inglall the language padid Fig Il 62 Upload Language Pack page 33 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e All internally stored voice mail and custom voice messages e Call statistics Pending events e Transfer statistics Please Note Only one custom Language Pack can be uploaded at the time Uploading a Language Pack will remove the existing one if applicable and will reboot the Quadro The Current Language Pack field displays read only information about the custom language pack uploaded When no custom language pack is uploaded the field indicates unknown Below there is a Language Pack File to Upload text field that displays the selected image filename The Browse button is used to browse the custom language pack to be uploaded The Remove Current Language Pack link is only seen when a custom language pack is uploaded and is
81. Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Quadro The Global Phone Network in a Box Manual II Administrator s Guide for Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi Edition 1 May 2009 SW Release 5 1 17 and higher Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Table of Contents Manual see Installation Guide Step by step guide to install and configure Quadro basically Manual II Administrator s Guide ADOUt PAIS ACMIINIStFacOr S GUO Ge crcectencenct Sood ienne CREE EEEE EEE nn eu coued EEEE AEE EENEN 5 Quadro s Graphical NEE a E o canvaniletncdaspudwaaescbacnnsnnededassupe dash esneetaantebavencdeesenianeodesqasiauneesnemanencacesaeacdnaiet 5 AdmMiNstrator s Mair Pag Er ee ia nn ene ee E ee ee 5 Recurrent DUONG tcc tect cata cada cadacadadadadadadadanadans dans danadadadadadacadadndada dats dainnteeeeaieiaeaiaeeeaeedacninhs a adetaadacadadadacadadadacadansdanacacae 6 Recor orne PUn EON illo OTTON iraan AEEA EEA AEE EENE EE E tn ee en eee ne AAA AAE 6 Entering SIP Addresses Correctly sirerscernes enakan Kan EARNE AEE AEE ADAE AAAA AAAA AA 6 Admins ator S MENUS ssiieesninas siine ia a Ee a aa aE E EE AEEA 7 EA E E E eee meer ere ease eens tree ee a eee ee eee reer eT ero NT Tre TTT rrr rrr rr cre rere rere rere rere rere rere rere 7 Volem Conigurao WIZA renee nn ee enn ne ee ee ere er on ee ee ee ee ee eee ee enn enn 7 Internet COMiGUnatlOn Wiz arg facie eneeeaeeeeaaeeeeenaweaaawewese EE EE EE nieces oad EEEE EE
82. Quadro when activating the Call Park service if it is routed to the corresponding extension The pickup user will be prompted to pass the authentication by inserting the password of the Quadro user where the call has been parked in order to retrieve the parked call For example the Call Park service is enabled for extension 23 which has been registered on the SIP Server under the 892220 registration username While being on a call with user A the Quadro user dials the appropriate calling code As a reply Quadro will play the 892220 to the Quadro user while user A is put on hold The Quadro user then moves to a different location and makes an SIP call to the 892220 number When this SIP call is established to the 892220 number user A will then be connected to the Quadro user and the conversation will resume Please Note Any PBX or IP calls addressed to the extension where the call has been parked will require you to pass the authentication to reconnect the Destination party being parked The parked Destination party will be disconnected if an incorrect password has been inserted and authentication has been rejected To avoid unexpected calls received on the extension used for the call parking it is recommended to use virtual extensions for the Call Park service Upload Universal Extension Recordings The Upload Universal Extension Recordings are to be defined by the Quadro administrator and will be present instead of the default voice messages f
83. Repeal every 1 mi manman 1 times E Expires n Blocking Page for the Administrator cpysi Tikim oie greebag ale Upload new oul of oios areating ihe CmeckatoDomion wiv Experetion Date amd Teme Mar z7 2005 L Remove wiii Mae On Send e Sond pow voids massage nobicabons va SME Mobile qumber J7481 14151 Repeat eweary 1 mim m na 1 hina e Send mew voice message nolficalions via phone call Catit Sie bai SIP peas Droas apg Com Cal lo Ripia 1 mi maim 1 ime E Resio detmi Meglicaion Message Upload new Hobiicabon Message Cmedianoliication wi Browne J cii Lass moi caion oping O Reston aetaut gretig ili Ugioad new graating tiie Cmediaigraating wav bowen bee Mail Pioi Sre Back C ppignt PL MS p a LE A T d Fig Il 203 Voice Mail Settings for the Administrator 110 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus When the first routing rule is used and the call reaches the extension that has the corresponding voice mail profile the settings of the ForPSTN voice mail profile will be activated For the second routing rule when the call reaches Mike s voice mailbox the settings of the ForPBX voice mail profile will be activated The same profile name can be used to create profiles for different extensions This is useful if the profiles have a similar purpose but differ in certain user specific settings such as voice mail greeting ZeroOut d
84. Settings SIP and SIP Advanced Attendant 00 Settings Codecs Universal Extension Recordings Receptionist Management Extension Directory Authorized Phones Database Call Statistics SIP Settings RTP Settings Appendix System Default Values System Default Value Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a G726 32 G726 16 G726 24 G726 40 enabled iLBC H 263 H 263 disabled for FXS lines Codecs G711u preferred G711a G729a enabled G726 32 G726 16 G726 24 G726 40 iLBC H 263 H 263 disabled for IP lines Out of Band DTMF Transport enabled T 38 FAX enabled Pass Through FAX enabled Pass Through Modem disabled Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls disabled Display name Attendant FAX forwarding enabled Extension to forward 12 Show on Public Directory enabled Percentage of System Memory 1 Display name Attendant FAX forwarding enabled Extension to forward 14 Show on Public Directory enabled Percentage of System Memory 1 Scenario default send AA digits to Routing Table disabled Redirection on Timeout disabled Welcome Message enabled Welcome Message Recurring Attendant Prompt default Attendant Ringing Announcement disabled Same as for an extension Codecs G711u preferred G711a G726 16 G726 24 G726 32 G726 40 G729a iLBC enabled H 263 H 263 disabled
85. Settings This page only appears when the Advanced Settings checkbox is selected on the previous page of the wizard This page contains the following components ISDN L2 Timers e Excessive Ack Delay T200 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 500 to 9999 between the transmitted signaling packet and its acknowledgement received e Idle Timer T203 configures the period in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 99999 for the ISDN client idle timeout Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 72 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus ISDN L3 Timers e The T302 Timer text field requires the value for the T302 timer in milliseconds digit values from O to 15000 It indicates that the time frame system is waiting for a digit to be dialed When the timer expires it initiates the call e T309 Timer requires the value for the T309 timer in milliseconds numeric values from 0O to 90000 It is responsible for call steadiness during link disconnection within the period equal to this timer value If the value in ieakbtoas this field is zero 0 the T309 timer will be disabled La ang e T310 Timer requires the value for the T310 timer in milliseconds numeric values from 1000 to 120000 It is responsible for the outgoing call steadiness when CALL PROCEEDING is already received from the destination but call confirmation ALERT CONNECT DISC or PROGRESS has not yet arri
86. X Voicemail call type routing rules The Next button will open the Call Routing Wizard Page 4 where different information about Inbound Caller will be required depending on the selected Inbound Call Type For the SIP Inbound Call Type the Inbound Host text field will require one or more IP addresses or host names of the Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 81 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus SIP server where the caller is registered or the caller s device if they are direct calls separated by a space If the FXO or ISDN Inbound Call Types are selected the Inbound Port ID drop down list will require selecting the FXO line number or ISDN Trunk correspondingly and in the next step a list of timeslot s used to receive calls from the defined caller The Call Routing Wizard Page 5 appears if the Set Date Time Period s checkbox previously had been enabled on Page 1 of the Local Call Routing Wizard It will require information about the pattern validity period s This page provides selection between Typical and Custom Man Syetem Users Telephone internet Upiiik Network date time rule definitions The Typical selection contains the following group of radio buttons that are used to select the frequency of the corresponding routing Date Time Rules Add Entry pattern that is to take place Call Routing Wizard e Daily e Weekly the preferred weekday s should be selected
87. ackets to these routers Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 28 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Attention No Traceroute is possible if a high priority Firewall has been enabled see chapter Firewall and NAT For the purpose of tracerouting several IP packets are sent out UDP User Datagram Protocol is used to send packets and ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is used to receive information about the routers In their headers the TTL Time To Live value increases from 1 to 30 When the first IP frame is received by the first router its IP address will be returned in its acknowledgement Hain System Users Telephony itemei Upink Hatecak The second frame delivers the IP address of the second router Networking Tools and so on and so forth The results of Traceroute are displayed on the lower area of the page 192 160 0 26 EEST j l Sipepyegleom Tmoemutw Ping Target requires the destination IP address or host name for the ICMP request The Ping button starts pinging the specified ping target Traceroute Target is used to enter the IP address or host name of the destination to be trace routed The Traceroute button is used to process the router triggering to check the Internet connection In the field below these the output of the Ping or Traceroute Fig Il 51 Networking Tools page procedure is shown g g pag To Check the Internet connection
88. ad a legible configuration file links leads you to the Legible Configuration Management page where legible configuration can be downloaded and uploaded back after the required edits Automatic Firmware Update The Automatic Firmware Update page allows you to configure an automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image as it becomes available on the server When this service is enabled on the configured day and time Quadro will automatically check for a new available firmware on the server and will either notify the administrator or update the firmware right away depending on the configured settings The server configuration can be done manually or through the DHCP server In case of DHCP server replying configuration the corresponding adjustments should be done on the DHCP server to automatically point the Quadro to the destination where the firmware is stored Please Note Independent on the selected server type there should be an auto update folder in the root directory of the server Quadro will check for any new firmware in that specific folder only Besides the firmware bin file the auto update folder should contain supplementary file s to point to the correct firmware file The detailed instructions on the functionality of automatic firmware update as well as server configuration are described in the Automatic Firmware Update document which you can find at the Epygi Web support portal This page consists of
89. al plan The Emergency Codes text field requires the PSTN numbers of the emergency or lifeline services Multiple emergency codes separated by commas can be inserted in this field For each emergency code a routing pattern will be generated in the Call Routing Table which will allow faster and easier calls to emergency destinations The PSTN Access Code drop down list allows you to select the prefix code for accessing the PSTN line in the routing mode Dialing the digits inserted in this text field will provide the PSTN dial tone when dialed from the handset Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main System Users Telephony kannet Uplink System Configuration Wizard System Configuration Fig Il 4 System Configuration Wizard Man Sytem Users lelephcay kernet Uplink Metwoek System Configuration Wizard Regional Settings and Preferences Your locale Jocation S v Timezone GMT 06 00 Central Tene US amp Canada Choose System Language Choose Default OU Theme Previous Main System Weera Tedeplecany imore plink Harwork System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Code Settings Previews Fig Il 6 System Configuration Wizard Emergency Codes and PSTN Codes Settings page Administrator s Menus System Configuration page Help Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Internet Configuration Wizard Administrator s Menus The Internet Conf
90. allows the call controlling applications running on a user PC to remotely initiate and handle calls on the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro e G729 Support enables G 729 codec support on the Quadro When the key is entered up to 2 additional G 729 codec licenses are added on Quadro2x models and up to 6 additional G 729 codec licenses are added on Quadro4x models For other Quadro models no additional G 729 codec licenses are available at the moment This codec allows placing calls with low bandwidth therefore less traffic is used e Please Note Quadro uses a G 729 license for e G 729 calls from external SIP destinations to local PBX extensions and vice versa e G 729 calls from external SIP destinations to PSTN lines attached to the Quadro and vice versa e G 729 calls from external SIP destinations to Quadro s Auto Attendant e Voice mail session access from external SIP destination using G 729 e External SIP calls to or from IP phones attached to the Quadro do not use a G 729 license e QCM Support allows Quadro s extensions to be used by Quadro Communication Manager after QCM trial period expires Depending on the feature key type additional 4 or 10 QCM licenses can be activated on the Quadro Main System Users Telephony hites met Uplink Network Features Inique O 02 4 1 38 074700 Abd Up ade Abatia Feann es Name IP Prane Peas a TUe support uppor
91. also used to remove it from the system Pressing Save will start uploading the custom language pack to the board Attention Pressing the Save button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your device manually even if you have cancelled the language pack update procedure on the following steps The next page displayed will show verification of the language pack being uploaded and asks for confirmation to overwrite the existing custom language pack if applicable After final confirmation the system will upload the selected custom Language Pack and it will reboot User Rights Management The User Rights Management service sets restrictions on the GUI access for various users permits or denies the access to certain Web GUI configuration pages and creates multilevel user management of the Quadro The feature is useful to the ISPs in order to set the restrictions for certain customers to manage the Quadro s configuration Two levels of Quadro GUI administration are available Administrator this is the main administrator s account The administrator can configure to have the factory reset safe the default password or choose not to The administrator has access to all Web GUI pages and no one else has configuration permission to adjust this account The administrator is responsible for granting access to all other user groups Local Administrator this is a common sub administrator s account T
92. aracters Wildcards Any number of any characters Any single character A character or a string from the specified set of characters and strings The following control symbols are used to specify a set s Use a comma to separate the elements of a set Please Note No spaces are allowed within braces Example The pattern is 9 1 3 11 a Numbers matching the pattern are 91 93 911 9a s Use a minus sign to specify a range of characters Each successive element of the range is obtained by increasing the previous element the element code by one Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2145 2155 2a5 2b5 2c5 2d5 Use an exclamation point to exclude a character or a string from a set Example The pattern is 2 11 15 a d 14 c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 2115 2125 2135 2155 2a5 2b5 2d5 Please Note You can use the wildcard within the braces but not Thus 12 104 15 36 is a valid pattern whereas 15 36 is not Please Note The symbol cannot be used to exclude a range of symbols For example 2 15 60 23 32 or 2 15 60 23 132 are not valid patterns To valid pattern will be to 2 15 22 33 60 The same as above with the exception that character ranges can include single digit character elements only Example The pattern is 2 1 5 a c 5 Numbers matching the pattern are 215 225 235 245 255 2a5 2b5 2c5 Precedes a contr
93. arch the call reports within the Call Statistics table Please Note To return to the complete Statistics Table clear all search criteria and press Filter To Reset the Statistics 1 Press the Clear All Records button in the Call Statistics Settings page 2 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes The call statistics will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the statistics information click on No RTP Statistics The RTP Statistics page provides detailed information about the established call is provided When Quadro serves as an RIP proxy this page displays two groups legs of RTP statistics For example when calling from an IP Phone attached to the Quadro s IP line to an external SIP destination or from one external SIP destination to another through the Quadro s Auto Attendant Each group of parameters describes characteristics of a piece of RIP stream composing an overall SIP session Normally one leg describes the RTP stream from caller to the Quadro and the other leg describes the RTP stream from Quadro to the destination Quality estimated call quality which depends on RTP statistic Bin Syme lema Talaphiny iasinsr Llink Heiwrak RTP Statistics uaii i jie heck 177 MLM id Denote 17990 S50 M Diay i jeca Fii Ctethec PCH TE Coiler FEMIJ Recehend Packers INg Iranani Packets Roced Packa Sire Manem Packe Sire 160 Ril Lost Packem Bat Jitter Fd Mindi Delage Im Ria Deby mesae Comm D Rial D
94. ations and ZeroOut settings The Voice Mail Profiles are activated based on the call routing rule used to establish a call This is limited to the PBX Voicemail type of calls used for a direct access to the extension s voice mailbox The Voice Mail Profile name should be provided in the Call Routing wizard when defining a PBX Voicemail routing rule When the rule is used caller accesses the called extension s mailbox with the settings configured in the corresponding voice mail profile With this service you can pre configure several versions of Voice Mail Settings and save them as Voice Mail Profiles For example if a call is originated from the PSTN network to the corresponding extension s voice mailbox the greeting message can tell the caller You have reached the company please leave a message and the maximum voice mail duration is configured to 15 minutes This voice mail profile can be saved as ForPSTN and its name should be defined in the routing rule responsible for incoming PSTN calls distribution In parallel to this voice mail profile there can be another profile designed for internal PBX calls It will play the following voice mail greeting Hi you have reached Mike s voice mailbox please drop me a message and shall call you back the maximum voice mail duration is 5 minutes and there is a ZeroOut feature configured to call Mike s cellular phone This voice mail profile can be saved as ForPBX and its name should be def
95. audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Logout This option is used to close the session between the user PC and Quadro and to leave the Quadro Web Management or to enter the management with another login By selecting the Logout button the startup page will be displayed and the user needs to login again Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 113 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator The following PBX Services are accessible at the dial tone characterized by beginning with the key Administrator Login Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator Allows to modify Auto Attendant greeting and menu messages as well as to manage universal extension messages Enabling disabling the Call Routing rules 600 Allows managing the routing entries in the Call Routing table i e to enable disable certain dialing rules by dialing key combinations pre configured on each routing entry By dialing 000 you will be required to dial enabler disabler key to enable or disable the routing rule s correspondingly Since multiple routing rules may have the same enabler disabler key combinations the same key may be used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one dialing the certain key will affect all pre configured routing rules If the routing record has an authorization enabled o
96. ave been received This feature can be also used within Receptionist Management see below for more details The Enable checkbox activates the Call Queue functionality on the extension The Call Queue Size text field requires the length of the call queue This is the maximum number of calls that will be accepted into the queue and kept on hold while the extension user is on a call If a maximum number of calls are already held SL ESS i SS ers LS Eee in the call queue the next incoming call will be routed to the extension s Voice Mail if enabled or will be disconnected Extensions Management Edit Entry Please Note By configuring Call Queue size Call Forwarding if Call Queue Settings 11 Busy and Voice Mail telephony services will not take effect on the corresponding extension until the call queue is not filled cum catinag cangue Be These telephony services will affect only the calls out of the call Call Queue setings Max Call Queve Agpearance queue oie ples SERVOS F Enasi Reedinection mite Te Call Queue Message Repetition Count The Max Call Queue Appearance text field requires the maximum number of active calls on the line For example if 1 is Call Type SP configured in this field and the extension is in use the next GoToUees Setingan Address 1970798 8in enyo coen _ s Cipboard incoming call will go to the call queue If 2 is configured in this Go Te Line Settings field and extension is in
97. be selected Attention Pressing the Next button will stop some vital processes on the Quadro therefore you will need to reboot your device manually even if you have cancelled the firmware update procedure on the following steps Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 27 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Tedoglecary Meetnet Uplink Netwoth Firmware update The second page of Firmware update has a Browse button used to browse the image file and the Specify Image text field that will display the selected image filename Udetet tedimmagesReleeseBullMsSohoBaseUriet Pressing Save will start uploading the image file to the board and the next page will display results and verification of the image being burned Fig Il 48 Firmware Update page 2 Ban Sytem Users Telephony bien Uplink Network CP epygi This page displays non editable information about the iii image validity The Image Check field will display invalid Firmware update if the image does not correspond to the hardware version The Current Software Version field shows the old software version The New Software Version field shows the new version of the software image This page needs to be confirmed in order to continue image updating If you are sure that the image version is appropriate for your device press Save Fig Il 49 Firmware Check page Firmware update If you have c
98. be sent to the mobile phone specified in the SMS Settings page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 24 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Actions that are not allowed for the selected event like mail notification if the PPP link is down or the mail server has been configured improperly are hidden For multiple events editing actions that are not appropriate for least one of the selected events will also be hidden Please Note In case of an IDS Intrusion Detection System intrusion alert only the first possible intrusion in each 10 minute period will initiate an event This helps to avoid flooding the System Events table and flooding the user with various intrusion alerts that result from each possible Denial of Service attack When these events are displayed in the System Events table the user can receive detailed information about the intrusions through a link to the IDS log list If Quadro cannot receive an IP address from the DHCP or PPP servers or cannot register an extension on the SIP or Routing servers or cannot reach an NTP server it raises only one event for the entire period the action has failed but will continue to try When the required action is successful Quadro raises an appropriate message To Assign an Action to the Event 1 Select the checkbox of one or more events to assign an action to them 2 Press the Edit button The Edit Event Settings page appears
99. ble a next subsequent not used SIP user name will be used instead SIP Server text field requires the address of the SIP server The field is not limited regarding symbol usage and length as it can be either an IP address or a host address e g sip epygi com SIP Port text field requires the port number to connect to the SIP server The SIP Port may only contain digit values otherwise an error message SIP Port is incorrect will appear If the SIP server port is not specified Quadro will access the SIP server via the default 5060 port Registration on SIP Server checkbox enables the SIP server registration option on the newly created extensions Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 48 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Extension Codecs To establish IP voice communication both partners have to use the same codec When establishing the communication line this codec is negotiated If the caller does not find an appropriate codec the communication cannot take place If you want to be reachable by all IP calls it is helpful to support as many codecs as possible In this case all the codecs that Quadro offers should be added to the Codecs table Some codecs require a high transfer rate of up to 64 kbit s If you are certain you do not want to use these codecs make sure they are not listed in the table Codecs The Codecs table lists the voice and video codecs supported by the Qua
100. bled when Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer or Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer the is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Local Subnet lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from all stations connected to the local network to the remote VPN gateway device local Quadro and remote subnet are not included The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt Internet lt gt NAT lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Quadro lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from the local Quadro to all stations of the remote LAN local subnet and remote VPN gateway devices are not included The checkbox is disabled when Quadro lt gt NAT lt gt Internet lt gt Peer is selected from the VPN Network Topology drop down list on the first page of the IPSec Connection Wizard Local Subnet lt gt Remote Subnet allows access from all stations of the local network to all stations of the remote LAN VPN gateway devices are not included In this case the local and remote subnet IP addresses and subnet masks have to be entered in the corresponding text fields Local Subnet IP and Remote Subnet IP More than one of the above checkboxes may be selected to specify the desired communication relations The Stop Connection if not successful checkbox allows you to stop the IPSec connection a
101. c selection for Quadro2x models Man Svalem Users Telephon bierne Uplink Heleh epyzi This page offers the following components E Volce Mall Common Settings The Recording Codec drop down list contains the existing codecs for voice mail compression Changing the Voice Mail recording codec will directly affect the allocated memory size for users nihin oa GT CS4CELP soeech coding at g kbar s rape 5 1 Menary Allee ata The Memory Allocation manipulation radio buttons allow choosing the location where the user s voice mails are to be saved They can be saved either in the Embedded Memory Storage User s Space assigned to the Quadro extensions or the external USB flash memory device Fig Il 159 Voice Mail Coming Settings page e Selecting Embedded Memory Storage will save the user s voice mails in the device s internal flash memory The available memory for every user is configured on the Extensions Management page e Selecting External USB Flash memory allows keeping the user s voice mails on the external USB device attached to the Quadro This will save space for the assigned User s space Selecting the External USB Flash and saving the page settings will start the USB Flash memory automatic configuration The USB flash memory device needs to be formatted to be available to the Quadro A confirmation message will ask for the USB flash memory formatting verification Attention Formatting will erase all existing data
102. calls to attendant to the specified redirect address As a result calls prefixed with O will never reach call routing Attendant Welcome Message this group allows updating the active Auto Attendant welcome message played only once when entering Auto Attendant downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Enable Welcome Message checkbox is used to enable disable the Auto Attendant welcome message the default one or the custom one uploaded from this page or recorded from the handset see Feature Codes being played when callers enter Quadro s Auto Attendant Upload new welcome message indicates the file name used to upload a new welcome message The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u Law wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension and the You do not have enough space warning message will appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new welcome message file The Download Welcome Message and Remove Welcome Message links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Welcome Message link is used to download the message file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Welcome Message
103. can be configured automatically The Uplink Configuration page allows you to select the Quadro s WAN interface connection type and its bandwidth settings These settings will make Quadro available to the external network Depending on the Uplink Interface Protocol selection the page following the Uplink Configuration page is different Thus if PPPoE is selected the next page will be PPP Configuration while selecting Ethernet will bring up the WAN IP Configuration page The Uplink Configuration page offers the following components The WAN Interface Protocol radio buttons are used to choose the protocol depending on the requirements of the ISP Internet Service Provider PPPoE turns on the PPP over an Ethernet connection PPTP turns on the Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP interface used for the connection between Quadro and ADSL modem A fixed IP address configuration is needed in this case Ethernet turns on the Ethernet connection Man Sein Users Tehei mermet Uplink Helaork Internet Configuration Wizard Uplink Configuration Previgua Fig Il 8 Internet Configuration Wizard Uplink Configuration page The WAN Interface Bandwidth settings allow the specification of the upstream and downstream speeds in kbit s helping to assure the quality of IP calls An IP call looses the voice quality if there is no available bandwidth When approaching the limits of bandwidth capacity another IP call will be
104. cation Manager cense Ge To User Seminas Go Lo Line Setliurs Fig Il 78 Extensions Management Edit Entry License Settings page The Go to User Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the extension specific Extension s Main Menu page see Manual III Extension User s Guide Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 41 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Go to Line Settings link is used to make a quick jump to the Line Settings page of the corresponding extension Pickup Group Extension Settings Pickup Group amp Access List The Pickup Group service is used to monitor calls addressed to a certain list of extensions and to pick up calls ringing on the listed extensions This service may be used when a group of extensions are located in the same area so the persons nearby can hear the ringing on one of the extensions This feature allows you to pick up the call ringing on a certain extension by dialing the number of the pickup extension The Pickup Group list is used to define the extensions that can be monitored by calling a certain pickup extension The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are allowed or forbidden to intercept calls ringing on extensions in the Pickup Group lf a user dials the pickup extension when several extensions of the pickup group are ringing the first oldest in time call will be picked up When the us
105. ces are disabled Call Blocking message files default Intercom Allow Activation on Request No answer timeout 20 sec Call Waiting Service enabled Autoredial Interval 10 sec Autoredial Period 15 min Send Hold Music to remote party disabled Hold Music Own Music Music file default Disabled Timeout 30 min Send Message to Caller enabled Disabled Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 122 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement Appendix Software License Agreement EPYGI TECHNOLOGIES LTD Software License Agreement THIS IS A CONTRACT CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT USE OF THE QUADRO HARDWARE AND OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE PROGRAM INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU MAY NOT USE THE HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE 1 License Epygi Technologies Ltd the Licensor hereby grants to you a non exclusive right to use the Quadro Operational Software program the documentation for the software and such revisions for the software and documentation as the Licensor may make available to you from time to time collectively the Licensed Materials You may use the Licensed Materials only in connection with your operation of your Quadro You may not use copy modify or transfer the Licensed Materials in whole or in part e
106. ckboxes Enable automatic PPP restart at checkbox is used to select the time when the PPP connection will automatically be restarted The checkbox selection enables LCP echo failures text field that indicates the number of the LCP echo failure packets received before the PPP connection will be considered as dead and will be restarted Disable CCP Compression Control Protocol negotiation this option should only be selected if the peer system is not working properly For example if it is not accepting the requests from the PPPD Point to Point Daemon for CCP negotiation Disable magic number negotiation with this option PPPD cannot detect a looped back line This option should only be selected if the peer is not working properly Man adem ler lepry kiani ipint hetace bh Advanced PPP Settings Disable protocol field compression negotiation in both the receive and the transmit direction with this option no protocol field compression will take place Disable Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression in both the transmit and the receive direction with this option no negotiation of TCP IP header compression will take place and the header will always be sent uncompressed Disable the connection ID compression option in Van Jacobson style TCP IP header compression with this option PPPD will not compress the connection ID byte from Van Jacobson and will not ask the peer to do so Disable the IPXCP and IPX protocols th
107. cn ee eee ee eee eee ee ee E ee er eee 75 Ga ONT ClO rages ae teeter EEEE E EAE E thie ehe bel rbbin late bitidd bia E EE A 76 SIP Tunnel Settings s ssssssrssrrensrrrrsrrrrrsrrrrsrrrretrrretnrrr errr ot rrr rtr r1 rnr rrerEESEAEEEEAEEEEAEEESEAENSEAEEEEPEEEESEEEESEEEEEE REESE EEEE EEEE 76 CROO e E A E E E E 78 Allowed Characters and Wildcards cds sedesccecudesrcrccdvecdesuccacsicciwoneaasceontausieencaaseusataunsasesananeuaseeaceusssue ec eaeaessoeareasaesenest 84 DE EME AA O E a E E I EEEE E 85 VOIRE AE AAN Za Cl E E E E E E eee ei 87 RADIUS Client Settings sssssesrrrrsrrrnrrrrrrrrrrsrrrretrrretrrrrt rritet rrr otn rrr tnr rrSr1NSAAENSPAEEEEAEEESAEEESEAEEEEENEEESEEEESEEEEEE EEEE REEERE Ennt 89 va e Mak CommMmon NN eei aeiaai EAA AAAA EEA E EEEE EEEE eiia 90 GIN Plea eC UlINO S a TA 90 IPEE SONO ara ates ca ene tice E dec ene eee desea e nce oe ceeeeene eee cssee eee oeegee serene uy tenn A E E 91 RIP Streaming Channel S eect A ionseererasesecteweseend ndaledeseieiadanebesndoatas 91 Erne EU Ek ele eeeemeremamcme meee seme cern mere rerrn mein amy neta ne eerie ttre ie tr eat ene EEEE E een een tree mre meen eee nee rre eee Tre reenter een ree 92 PPP PEEP ie MN cee A ne seesagacsoeeeaaseosecueguecseesagecsseseassns aces s4 teu uasaseoaac asda ca pagueeceeesaqecsoesegaseoseeceaueos 92 ONeill 8126 PPR o STERG er er ee Te ne er ee ee eer eT Teer TT cee ce een ee ere ee 92 VPN SolpidicUgcld ic tt tnt E ne EE ee ee 93 Dynamic DNS Settings n
108. collected on the remote server Radio button selection enables a sub group of manipulation radio buttons If the remote Voice Mail Server is combined with the SIP Proxy server it is recommended to select Proxy Controlled Mailbox Type With this selection SIP proxy will keep the recorded voice mail on itself When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing 0 the call will be redirected to the voice mailbox on the proxy server f the remote Voice Mail Server acts as a standalone location of voice mails it is recommended to select Independent Mailbox Type With this selection Quadro redirects the recorded voice mails to the defined remote Voice Mail server When extension accesses his mailbox by dialing 0 the call will be redirected to the remote voice mail server Cepysi D Quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings Voice Mailbox Settings 11 SIP Settings Disable Voice Mail Remote Settings Use Internal Voice Mail Call Queue Settings Configuration wizard status Inactive SIP Advanced Settings Voice Mailbox Settings Licensing Use External Voice Mail Proxy Controlled Mailbox Type Yoice Mail Retrieve SIP URI Independent Mailbox Type Mailbox URI Transport Protocol for SIP messages Go To User Settings Go To Line Settings Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 77 Extensions
109. contain some kind of password which should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management Administrator s Menus Cepysi quadro Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Global SNMP Settings Global SNMP Settings SNMP Trap Settings V Enable SNMP System Location Quadro Network System Contact admin sip epygi com Enable SNMP v1 2c SNMP v1 v2c Read Only Community public Enable SNMP v1 2c Read Write Access SNMP v1 2c Read Vyrite Community private Service Restart Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 52 Global SNMP Settings page The Service Restart button restarts the SNMP sub system on the Quadro Restarting the SNMP sub system is recommended if it does not respond to a SNMP manager s requests SNMP Trap Settings are used to define the traphosts that should be informed when certain events occur on the Quadro For the listed traphosts to be informed about the events on the Quadro Send SNMP Trap action should be configured for the corresponding event s from the Events page SNMP Trap Settings page contains a list of all configured traphosts with the referring information Add functional button is used to add a new traphost to the table and opens Add SNMP Traphost page where the new traphost might be defined Page consists of the following components Traphost text field requires an IP address or
110. contract for using Quadro s hardware and software Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 4 Quadro Manual II Administrator s Guide Quadro s Graphical Interface Quadro s Graphical I nterface Administrator s Main Page When the administrator logs in the Quadro Management page is displayed with a table of active calls including information about call peers call duration and start time at the startup The button Terminate next to each active call is used to terminate the corresponding call The number of total active calls is displayed above the table Maim oSyeten 6 lbaaee Deeley Intent lh Materi h Quadro4x Management Active Calls Rone AA IP Ajjreps Fig Il 1 Quadro4x Management Here the administrator may access the following settings and perform the actions By clicking on System Users Telephony Internet Uplink or Network the administrator may access the following settings in each respective category and perform actions specific to each category The Install Checklist option in the Main Menu opens a page that lists the most useful actions and the corresponding hyperlinks for the Quadro s initial setup and configuration procedure From this page you can be linked to the appropriate pages where the corresponding configuration can be done Here you can also save your progress of Quadro s setup by selecting the corresponding action s checkbox and pressing Save System Menu Telephony Men
111. ction can be configured as well as PPTP and L2TP server settings can be adjusted The page consists of 3 sub pages The Connections page lists all existing connections are listed characterized by their Connection Name Type of the connection PPTP or L2TP the Client Server mode the State of the connection and the Remote Hostname IP the IP address or the hostname of the connection peer The state of the PPTP and L2TP Connections except for the Stopped state is established as a link that refers to the page where logout information about the connection status is displayed Logs can be useful to determine problems on PPTP or L2TP connections failure Add functional button leads to the PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard page where a new connection can be established Please note After creating a PPTP server connection PPTP connections between devices placed on the Quadro LAN and external devices will no longer be possible The PPTP pass through service for incoming and outgoing traffic will be automatically disallowed once a PPIP server connection is created The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard consists of several pages and allows you to create a new PPTP or L2TP connection The PPTP L2TP Connection Wizard Page 1 consists of the following components Connection Name text field requires a connection identification name The name of the connection cannot start with a digit symbol however it can contain digits further in the name
112. d The System Configuration Wizard allows the administrator to define the Quadro s Local Area Network settings and to specify regional configuration settings to make Quadro operational in its LAN The System Configuration Wizard MUST be run upon Quadro s first startup to make sure that it works properly in its network environment The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings System Configuration see below e DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface Regional Settings and Preferences see below Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings see below Main System late 6Tebepilenary hater ieet Hink Haiwi System Configuration Wizard Getting Started DHCP Settings for the LAN are described in the chapters below The LAN configuration and regional settings will be described later in this chapter Please Note It is strongly recommended to leave the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to the administrator Fig Il 3 System Configuration Wizard Start page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The System Configuration page contains the host name IP address and Subnet Mask information about the Quadro LAN interface These settings make Quadro available to the internal network The System Configuration page offers the following input options Host Name requires a host
113. d The Call Routing Wizard is divided into several pages Page 1 displays the following components Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 78 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Pattern text field specifies calls to which the rule should be applied If a call either inbound or outbound has a destination number that matches the specified pattern it will be completed according to the current rule A routing pattern may contain wildcards The complete list of characters and wildcards allowed in this text field is given in the chapter Allowed Characters and Wildcards Number of Discarded Symbols NDS requires the number of symbols that should be discarded from the beginning of the routing pattern The field should be empty if digits do not need to be discarded Only numeric values are allowed for this field otherwise the error message Error Number of Discarded Symbols is incorrect digits allowed only will appear Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Call Routing Wizard Prefix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any Routing Call Type Add Entry characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in front of the routing pattern instead of the discarded digits The Berto Record Enathor Kor following tags can be used for this field _ Disabler Key Pattern t ard supponed C Require Authorization for EnablingDisabling e lt cal
114. d and routed to 00 Attendant on all lines 4 FXO lines all lines enabled incoming and outgoing calls allowed and routed to 00 Attendant on all lines ISDN Trunks Trunk1 exists on Quadro2xi Trunk1 or Trunk 1 3 depending on the availability of BRI card on Quadro4xi Trunk 1 3 exists on Quadro16xi Settings for all available Trunks State started Interface Type User Connection Type PTMP Point To Multi Point Service Type No MSN Route Incoming Call to 00 Use Default outgoing Caller ID enabled Default outgoing Caller ID undefined Advanced Settings disabled Use PSTN lines of the other device disabled Authorization Parameters undefined FXS lines Transmit Gain 6 Receive Gain 0 FXO lines Transmit Gain 0 Receive Gain 6 ISDN Trunks Transmit Gain 0 Receive Gain 0 Voice Mail Recording Gain 0 Playback Gain 0 Enable Tunnels to Slave Devices disabled Tunnels to Slave Devices no entries Enable Tunnels to Master Devices disabled Tunnels to Master Devices no entries Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing disabled Local Routing table 4 entries defined for PBX IP PSTN and emergency calls establishment Table is in Brief View all records are shown Local AAA Table no entries RADIUS client disabled Voice Mail Recording G729a Embedded Memory Storage Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 120
115. d as if they were part of the Quadro LAN However this service can be manually denied here The Filtering Rules page provides several links Each link opens its specific parameters on the same page Only Change Policy see chapter Firewall and NAT Manage user Defined Services see chapter Service Pool and Manage IP Pool Groups see chapter P Pool lead to separate pages The Filtering Rules page also includes the currently selected firewall security Policy level and its description The table displayed on the bottom of this page shows the filters selected above specified by their State enabled or disabled the selected Service the set Action allowed or blocked the IP addresses the filters apply to if Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding With the exception of View All the table offers the following functional buttons e Enable is used to enable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear e Disable is used to disable the rule If no records are selected the error message No record s selected will appear e Add opens a filter specific page where new rules may be defined by a Service an Action a Restriction to certain IP address es or IP groups and if adding a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding the destination IP address for Forwarding d The page to add a rule for Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding
116. d behind NAT within the local network 255 ree iF cinbears_ Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask corresponding to the specified IP address Fig Il 121 NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry page To Configure the NAT Exclusion Table 1 Press the Add button on the NAT Exclusion Table page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window 2 Specify an IP Address and its Subnet Mask in the corresponding text fields 3 Press Save on the Add Entry page to add the selected IP range to the NAT Exclusion Table list To Delete an IP Range from the NAT Exclusion Table 1 Select the checkboxes of the corresponding IP range s that should to be deleted from the NAT Exclusion Table Press Select all if all IP ranges should to be deleted 2 Press the Delete button on the NAT Exclusion Table page 3 Confirm the deletion by pressing Yes The IP range will then be deleted To abort the deletion and keep the IP range in the list press No Line Settings The Line Settings are used to configure Quadro FXS and IP Line if available on the board settings The Line Settings page consists of two pages Onboard Line Settings page for onboard FXS lines configuration and IP Line Settings for IP Lines configuration Onboard Line Settings The Onboard Line Settings page is used to configure Quadro lines and to define the caller ID detection type configure remote party disconnect indication and select the ringer type on each of them Additionally thi
117. destination Along the way at least one intermediate node is typically encountered Routing is different than bridging The main difference between bridging and routing is that bridging operates at the OSI Data Link Layer Level Two Media Access Control Layer and routing operates at OSI Network Layer Level Three Quadro s IP Routing service allows you to route IP packets from one destination to another or to a specified router through Quadro or a Quadro VPN The IP Routing Configuration page is used to make IP Static IP Policy and VPN routes for IP packets routing This page consists of three tables Entries in the tables are color coded according to the state of the route For example yellow indicates disabled routes green indicates successful routes and red indicates routes with an error IP Static Routes are used to forward IP packets from the Network where the Quadro is connected to the specified destination The IP Static Routes table displays all established IP static routes with their parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Route To for the subnet where the incoming packets should be routed to and Via IP Address for the router IP address where incoming packets should be routed through Add opens the Add IP Static Route page where a new static route can be established Enable Disable is used to activate and deact
118. deviation smoothed absolute value of the difference D in packet spacing at the receiver compared to the sender for a pair of packets If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then for two packets i and j D may be expressed as D i j Rj Ri Sj Si Rj Sj Ri Si J i J i 1 D i 1 i J i 1 16 where J i is Rx Jitter for packet i For more details about Jitter calculations please refer to the RFC1889 Rx Maximum Delay maximum variance absolute value of actual arrival time of the RTP data packet compared to estimated arrival time measured in milliseconds If Si is the RTP timestamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP timestamp units for packet i then variance for packet i may be expressed as following V i Ri R1 Si S1 Ri Si R1 S1 Rx Maximum Delay max V i 8 Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 59 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus RX Delay Increase Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is increased during the call RX Delay Decrease Count indicates the number of times the delay in jitter buffer is decreased during the call Please Note RTP Statistics is logged only when at least one of the call endpoints is located on the Quadro For example it will not be logged when e calls incoming from or addressed
119. devices the SIP calls will be routed from Quadro1 to Quadro2 and vice versa Man Stem Users Leleplmnry Ber reed Upland Heimo h f SIP Tunnel Settings The SIP Tunnel Settings page is used to enable the Quadro as a slave or master device for SIP tunneling The page consists of the following components F Fnabis Tunneli to Sipa Dirican Turrets o Slt Darig F Fraide Tunneli to bastar Devices The Enable Tunnels to Slave Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a master device and allows you to configure the SIP tunnels to the slave Quadros When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Slave Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Slave Devices moves you to the page i Fig Il 142 SIP Tunnel Settings page where a list of slave devices needs to be defined Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 76 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Tunnels to Slave Devices page consists of a table where slave devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new slave device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The SIP Tunnel Name text field requires the tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel name with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quad
120. dro Each table entry is assigned a checkbox that is used to manipulate the entry for example to disable to move it up or down etc The table entries in bold type indicate codecs enabled for the selected extension attendant conference The enabled codecs participate in codec negotiation at the call setup The order of the enabled codecs is very important Each codec in the table has a higher priority than the codecs below it and a lower priority than the codecs above it A codec placed at the top of the table is used as the preferred codec When establishing a call the system will try this codec first If the remote party does not support the preferred codec the following codecs will be tried out strictly in the order given in the Codecs table Please Note Pay attention when configuring Auto Attendant Codecs as they are used by virtual extensions for redirecting the incoming calls Enable Disable functional button is used to enable or disabled the corresponding codec for the extension When the codec is disabled the extension user will not be able to use it for placing a call The Move Up Move Down butions are used to move the selected codec one level up down in the table The Make preferred button moves the selected codec to the top of the table setting its priority to the highest Clicking the Make preferred button when a disabled codec is selected will first enable the codec and then move it to the top The Out of Band DTMF Transport checkb
121. ds of Caller ID transmissions It is used to send the calling party s information Main Syeten Usera Telephony karme Uplink Hetwork to the phone attached to the selected line No Caller ID FSK send prior to the first ring oan FSK send between the first and second ring Sanana PE mad bate Frat aad erent dna FSK send both prior to a ring and between the first and second ring DTMF send prior to the first ring DTMF send between the first and the second ring e Combined send both DTMF prior to the first ring and FSK between the first and the second rings Line Settings Line 1 Renete Party Tisconnect indication e Quadro sends the current time date to the called phone Fig ll 123 Line Codec and Caller ID Settings page together with the caller s information A group of Remote Party Disconnect Indication parameters are used to configure the private PBX attached to the Quadro FXS port e The Enable Busy Tone Indication checkbox enables a busy tone transmission to the FXS port when the remote party being called is disconnected The Busy Tone Duration drop down list is used to select the period in seconds when a busy tone will be transmitted to the FXS port e The Enable Power Disconnect Indication checkbox enables the power cycling on the FXS line when the remote party being called is disconnected Power Disconnect is applied after the busy tone transmission on the FXS line The Disconnect Duration drop down list is used to s
122. e Since the specified maximum port has to be higher than the minimum port the error message Min port number should be less than max port number will appear if this condition is not met The port range must consist of digits only otherwise the error Incorrect Port Range only Integer values allowed will appear The difference between Max and Min RTP ports should be 100 ports or less according to the system s capabilities otherwise the corresponding warning appears RTP RTCP Port ranges cannot include the defined SIP UDP ports see SIP Settings otherwise an error message will appear Telephone Event Draft Support enables telephony events transmission according to the draft ietf avt ric2833bis 04 The checkbox needs to be toggled if the SIP destination party phone or IVR has problems recognizing DTMFs generated by the Quadro Enable RTCP Support enables Real Time Control Protocol support and allows for the RTCP packets transmission RTCP protocol is used for monitoring the RTP streams and changing RTP characteristics depending on Network conditions Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 61 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Main Seton Users Dakit k rin Up ink Network epyzi RTP Settings Edit Entry The RTP Settings Edit Entry page offers a drop down list and a checkbox rete ne Packetization Interval contains possible values in milliseconds a i a to b
123. e with this selection all the SIP traffic will be routed through the NAT server e Disable with this selection no SIP traffic will be routed Fig Il 116 General NAT traversal page through the NAT server The SIP Parameters page is used to configure NAT specific settings for SIP and offers two independent groups of settings UDP Parameters Manipulation radio buttons allow you to select the type of connection over NAT sk alg a ah Selecting Use STUN will switch to automatic discovery of NAT Traversal Settings Mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT STUN mon mani settings are configured on the STUN parameters page see pmpn ea below Selecting Use Manual NAT Traversal allows you to manually define the mapped settings for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT Mapped Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP UDP traffic over NAT Mapped Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP UDP traffic over NAT TCP TLS Parameters Mapped TCP Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP TCP traffic over NAT Fig Il 117 SIP Parameters page Mapped TCP Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP TCP traffic over NAT Mapped TLS Host requires the IP address of the mapped host for SIP TLS traffic over NAT Mapped TLS Port requires the port number on the mapped host for the SIP TLS traffic over NAT The RTP Parameters page is used to choose between the STU
124. e Extensions table is a list of all extensions and their parameters Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 36 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Cepysgi Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network ry oO D Quadro Extensions Management Edit Delete Selectall Inverse Selection Reset SIP Settings Attached Percentage of system Attached SIP Address Percentage of System Extension Display Name gt en Line a Memory Codecs Attendant FOO0 sip epygi loc 5060 12 8 min 34 sec PCMU Joe Smith Line 1 R 7001 sip epygi loc 5060 4 2 min 51 sec PCMA Anne Wilson Line 2 R 555 sip epygi loc 5060 4 2 min 51 sec PCMU Jane Doe Line 4 70017813 sip epygi loc 5060 4 2 min 51 sec PCMU Suzie Shopper None 70017814 sip epygi com 5060 4 2 min 51 sec G726 40 Diana White IP Line 1 70017831 sip epygi com 5060 4 2 min 51 sec PCMU Jimmy Taylor IP Line 2 70017832 sip epygi loc 5060 4 2 min 51 sec PCMU Hide extensions attached to disabled IP lines Upload Universal Extension Recordings Copyright C 2003 2008 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 70 Extensions Management page The following columns are present in the table Extension lists user or attendant extensions on the Quadro This number is used for internal PBX calls e Display Name indicates an optional display name to identify the call
125. e Quadro Operating System Quadro operating system hatnak inten auaa version Quadro Status General Information e Application Software Software and file system versions of the Quadro o Boot Loader Quadro boot loader version Cee teta a hiaai Lipa inti chon boar 24 min f sac Desce hosie Duada Chikko penaling syaienmn 41 ah moita npg bor Ate Applica Sai t 44136 Release e DSP Software Quadro DSP software version and the a Poot Loader PecBoct 31 Stifieiease Version 4 1 48 Date Saptemberi 2007 tat4at date of build E ania Adan omn ak A naenda e Language Pack this field is present only when the i custom language pack is uploaded and it indicates the version Fig Il 11 Quadro Status General Information page Network Status The Network Status page includes the following information about Interfaces Interface Name lists the Network interfaces available on the Quadro LAN WAN IPSec and a number of PPPs depending on the number of active PPP connections IP Address lists the IP addresses corresponding to each Man System Users Talkphony blernat Unk Network network interface Quadro Status Network Status Subnet Mask lists the subnet masks corresponding to each network interface Properties will list either the MAC address corresponding to each network interface on the Quadro or the PPTP L2TP and IPSec peer IP address if an active VPN IPSec or PPP interface exists Monitor i
126. e Up Move Down buttons are used to move call routing patterns one level up or down within the Call Routing table The sequence of the routing patterns is important when making routing calls because the Call Routing table is parsed from the top down and routing will take place according to the first pattern that matches the dialed number The Move To button is used to move the selected entry to a different position in the Call Routing Table This will increase or decrease the selected pattern s priority Pressing the button will open the page where a row number should be specified together with the position the selected entry is to be placed before or after the defined row The Local AAA Table page allows you to manage local authentication and the authorization database Callers dialing the routes which have an AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting option enabled will pass the authorization on the Local AAA Table by using a phone number or username password depending on the corresponding entry configuration on this page Call Routing Local AAA Table The caller passes authorization automatically if the detected phone hod EUR Dekete Soletti hese Selection number of the caller dialing a route has the AAA option enabled Metter tew Femimeatds ard Eme esaeren and is registered in the Local AAA Table If the caller ID service is pie disabled or the caller s phone number is not registered the caller is asked to enter a registration us
127. e configured for the selected codec The Enable Silence Suppression checkbox selection enables i Ea Fig Il 115 RTP Settings Edit Entr voice activity detection for the selected codec 3 3 z To Edit Codec Parameters 1 Select the codec from the Codecs Table that is to be edited 2 Press the Edit button on the RTP Settings page The Edit Entry page will appear in the browser window 3 Change values in Packetization Interval and or enable disable Silence Suppression 4 To save the codec settings press Save or to keep the initial data click Back NAT Traversal Settings The NAT Traversal Settings page is divided into separate pages used to configure General NAT settings SIP NAT parameters RTP and STUN parameters for NAT and a page where the NAT Exclusion table may be filled The General Settings page consists of a manipulation radio buttons group to select the mode of the NAT Traversal usage for the SIP traffic any incoming and outgoing SIP messages from and to the Quadro will be routed through the NAT PC NAT Traversal Settings Mam System Users Telephony BAe Up Network e Automatic with this selection system will analyze the Quadro s WAN IP address and if it is in the IP range specified for local networks according to RFC the SIP traffic will be routed through NAT Otherwise if Quadro s WAN IP address is outside the specified IP range no SIP traffic will be routed through NAT server Gener Eytt e Forc
128. e functionality of a VPN gateway on each side of the communication line An intelligent Internet access router for example Quadro delivers this function but also PCs or workstations may also be equipped with VPN gateway functionality Home offices typically prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses When Quadro is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address it will be set up to act as a VPN gateway Quadro is then prepared to establish an IPSec connection with another VPN gateway device but also allows access to Road Warriors A notebook laptop used by a traveling employee could also be a Road Warrior Access to their company s intranet via an IPSec connection can be obtained regardless of their location Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 93 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Quadro can also be set up to act as a Road Warrior If a home office is connected to the Internet via Quadro with PPPoE Point to Point Protocol and dynamic IP addressing setting up Quadro as a Road Warrior will allow an IPSec connection to the corporate network For the encryption and decryption of the data transmitted via the IPSec connection a key is used RSA used by Quadro is an asymmetric key system It has to be available on both sides of the IPSec connection and will generate a different pair of keys on each side a private key and a public key During the connection establishment some data is encr
129. e in this page The Route Incoming Call to drop down lists are used to select the destination where the incoming call addressed to the certain MSN number will be routed Choosing the Routing with inbound destination number selection will automatically use the initially dialed number to connect the destination without any additional dialing If MSN is disabled on the ISDN Wizard MSN Settings page the ISDN Wizard Routing Settings page contains only one Route Incoming Call to drop down list Selecting the Use Default outgoing Caller ID allows you to overwrite the source caller information with the one specified in the Default outgoing Caller ID field when placing outgoing calls toward the CO The Default outgoing Caller ID field requires the caller ID for the outgoing calls from the Quadro through the ISDN trunk That number should be registered at the CO and can be one of the MSNs provided by the CO If this checkbox is enabled but no value is defined in the Default outgoing Caller ID empty caller information will be sent to the CO If this checkbox is disabled the source caller information Fig Il 136 ISDN Wizard Routing Settings will be forwarded to the CO Select the Advanced Settings checkbox if you wish to adjust trunk s L2 and L3 Settings manually otherwise leave this checkbox unselected to use the system default values The ISDN Wizard L2 amp L3 Settings is used for advanced configuration only and contains L2 amp L3
130. e page where voice messages used in the uploaded custom scenario should be managed Main System Usas Telepliongy lester ive Uplink Metwvark This page provides the possibility of uploading voice messages to be Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages played in the custom Auto Attendant scenario It also removes and Attendant 00 downloads the uploaded files to a PC The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page contains a table where uploaded custom voice messages are listed Use the Download functional button to download and use Remove to delete the corresponding custom voice message Browse opens a file chooser window to browse for a custom voice message or for an archive file with the tar gz extension containing the custom attendant scenario and the voice prompt recordings Fig Il 90 Upload Custom Voice Messages page The Attendant Ringing Announcement group allows uploading an optional voice message that is played to callers instead of ring back tones when making calls through an auto attendant The Ringing Announcement can be enabled for both custom and default attendants Please Note The Attendant Ringing Announcement is played to SIP to extension and PSTN to extension calls only The announcement can also be played to SIP attendant SIP and PSTN attendant SIP calls if they are made by a call routing rule for which the RTP proxy is enabled The group offers the following components The Enable Ringing Announcement checkbox enable
131. e receptionist to determine the availability of managers for incoming call transfers to them Call Interception To use Call Interception service the managers phones watch option should be enabled and each manager should have a programmable key assigned on the receptionist s IP phone This is performed automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard When an incoming call addressed to the certain manager comes in the receptionist can see the corresponding programmable key blinking and the caller s ID on the phone s display The receptionist is able to intercept the incoming call by pressing the blinking key The caller will then be connected to the receptionist If the receptionist does not answer the call addressed to the manager and if the manager does not answer it either the call will be directed to the manager s voice mailbox if it is enabled If the manager s voice mailbox is not enabled the call will be disconnected Kickback Quadro allows the receptionist to forward the incoming calls to the manager s extension and if there is no answer or if the called extension is busy on another call the call is returned to the receptionist s phone instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer or busy the call will automatically get back to the receptionist Voicemail Transf
132. e sent back to the caller the caller will hear themselves in the handset Loopback Timeout provides the option of limiting the voice loopback diagnostics duration i e the caller will be disconnected from the Quadro when the Loopback Timeout expires The FXS Lines Loopback Settings page shows the only table where all FXS lines of the Quadro are listed On this page the loopback diagnostics may be enabled disabled and the Loopback Timeout can be adjusted for FXS lines e The FXS Lines Loopback table lists all the FXS lines on the Quadro along with their loopback parameters Loopback State and Loopback Timeout Wan Syviem Ua Teleph amip Heak C AI FXS Lines Loopback Settings The Edit functional link leads to the FXS Lines Loopback Settings Edit Entry page where Loopback Timeout in seconds may be configured for one or more selected FXS line s B Hep a The Enable Disable Loopback functional link is used to enable disable the Loopback service on the selected FXS line s e Fig Il 130 IP Line Settings Loopback page Hot Desking e f Quadro has limited number of analogue and IP phones connected and much more users wishing to make and receive calls through the Quadro some of the connected phones can be announced as public Public phones have no static owners they are just connected to the analogue or IP lines Each user that accesses the public phone should first login with the previously created virtual extension and the corresp
133. e subnet specified by the IP address and the Maskbits See above for more information about Maskbits URL Address requires the member hostname to be added to the group The User defined Group includes previously added groups that may also be added as a member to another group Member description text fields can be used to enter an optional description of the member To Add a new Group with Members To add a group with the given parameters press Save a eae a assign it to the currently selected group 1 po To Delete a Member Administrator s Menus Main Syme Users Telepieery imene Lili Network IP Pool Group Configuration Current Group ChatGroup fick Ed Delete S di iama Selection Mende P Fig Il 188 IP Pool Group Configuration page Main Syaani Users Telephony lem eriniet Lipdinik Network IP Pool Group Configuration Add Member Current Group ChatGroup Diana meniher sae Back Fig Il 189 IP Pool Group Configuration Add Member Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link on the Filtering Rules page Click on the Add button on the IP Pool Configuration page A page where a new group may be added will appear in the browser window Define a group name in the Group Name text field and fill in the Group Description if needed Open the IP Pool Group Configuration page by clicking on the group name Select the Add button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page A page opens where new members ma
134. e upstream bandwidth and is measured in kbit s The WAN IP Configuration page is only displayed if Ethernet or PPTP has been selected to be the uplink protocol It offers the following components The Assign automatically via DHCP radio button selection switches to automatic retrieval of the WAN IP address from a DHCP server at the ISP uplink Please Note DHCP referred to here is the one that runs on the provider s side and not the Quadro s personal DHCP server The Assign Manually radio button switches to the manual adjustment of IP settings This selection requests the following parameters IP Address requires the IP address for the Quadro WAN interface Subnet Mask requires the subnet mask for the Quadro device WAN interface Default Gateway requires the IP address of the router where all packets are to be sent to for example to the router of the provider The WAN Interface Configuration page may be used to modify the MAC address of the Quadro This might be necessary if the ISP Internet Service Provider requires a specified MAC address for example for authentication This page offers the following components MAC Address Assignment manipulation radio buttons e This Device turns to the default MAC address of the Quadro e User Defined requires user defined MAC Address The MTU drop down list allows you to select the maximum packet size on the Ethernet in bytes MTU is used to fragment the packets before transmittin
135. ecified location Fig Il 34 Configuration Management page Main System luee Teleplemmy Baart Ligalinik Natavid k The Automatically Backup Configuration Settings page allows you to enable the automatic backup of the system Automatically Backup Configuration Settings configuration and the voice data on the Quadro With this service Quadro will automatically backup the system configuration and the voice data and store it in the specified location This page contains the following components The Enable Automatically Backup checkbox enables automatic backup mechanism on the Quadro The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you to select whether the backup files will be delivered by email or stored in some location e The Send via Email radio button is used to send the automatically backed up files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email kteybares Sunday address of the administrating person to receive the Ceman automatically backup files aawe Bk e The Send to Server radio button is used to store the automatically backup files on a remote server This selection enables the following fields to be inserted Fig Il 35 Configuration Management page The Server Name requires the IP address or the host name of the remote server The Server Port requires the port number of the remote server The Path on Server requires the path on the server to store the backup files in
136. ecordings page Please Note Changing the Percentage of System Memory on this page will stop any recordings of universal extension voice messages from the handset Receptionist Management The receptionist feature on the Quadro offers a variety of services to manipulate with multiple calls to keep the calls in the queue with the perspective to be answered by the receptionist and finally to be forwarded to the corresponding destination if needed The following services are available to the receptionist Call Queue Extension Status Call Interception Voicemail Transfer Multi Company Receptionist Call Queue This feature allows keeping multiple incoming calls in the queue when being on the line and to answer calls in the order they have been received The usage of this service is not limited to receptionist only and can also be used by the extension user if configured correspondingly The configuration of the Call Queue feature is done from the Extensions Management Edit Entry page where the length of the call queue and the call queue appearance is defined When the Call Queue service is enabled the second arriving call to the receptionist extension user will be either set into the queue if call queue appearance is 1 or will be ringing in the background of the active call if call waiting is enabled for the user and the call queue appearance value is greater than 1 If the call ringing in the background isn t answered it will be trans
137. ed Phones Database to create a new trusted PSTN Caller with Call Back enabled They can also modify the Call Back destination of an existing PSTN Caller in the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s PSTN number that is previously routed to the Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller can use the x16 code see Feature Codes to create a new trusted PSTN Caller as well as to modify the Call Back destination for the already registered Caller in the Authorized Phones Database Entering the Permanent Call Back reconfiguration menu the system will ask the caller to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in Call Back settings After entering the login successfully the PSTN callers should follow the voice instructions for configuring a new entry or reconfiguring the existing entry in Authorized Phone database When the system accepts the settings the corresponding entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database The detected PSTN caller address must correspond to the one applied by the caller the FXO line must be available on the Quadro there must be network connectivity and the destination must be reachable The PSTN caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the PSTN caller will be reconnected t
138. ed connectan fee Fu SH hanes be Shove Device Tunet None P Turnia SP Tunnel SH hme to Master Devices Tenet Marie Mette Oevice Master Dne Port Bensaa Sate Reatst ation Date Tame F unel Joa 19 16885 34 4 1 Mot Regritere Fig Il 25 SIP Registration Status page Man been Unies Telepieony beets Wei Meterenk Quadro Status IP Lines Registration Status liana Ding Adareg feri ian Tans Tet wien Lape a9 m TI 20I Ga mun 3 ae D hon 4 ie Fig Il 26 SIP Registration Status page 16 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide License Status The License Status page displays a table with all available licenses on the Quadro and the corresponding settings for each license Currently only QCM license status is displayed This page includes the following information Type indicates the type of the license available on the Quadro Count indicates the number of the corresponding licenses available on the Quadro In Use indicates the number of used licensed from the total available licenses Extension lists the extensions that are using the corresponding license Links in this column move to the corresponding service configuration page for the extension IP Routing Configuration Man System Users Teteptrory kernet Upit Netaoih Quadro Status License Status Laeine stahn Administrator s Menus Fig Il 27 License Status page Routing is used to relay information across the Internet from a source to a
139. ediately Pressing Save will restore the selected backup file and delete all current user defined greetings and replace configuration settings Attention Restoring the configuration and voice data requires switching Memory Allocation see chapter Voice Mail Common Seitings to the state that was selected when the configuration and voice data were backed up otherwise an error message prevents uploading the backup file The Restore Default Configuration functional button resets all configuration settings and restores the board s factory default configuration By restoring the default configuration you will replace your current configuration lose all voice mails and reboot the device You will not be automatically redirected to the GUI start page After the successful reboot you will need to enter into the management page and login again to access the Quadro s configuration A warning message will ask you to confirm your selection before restoring the default configuration Please Note Unlike the factory default settings restore procedure initialized from the Reset button on the Quadro board this link will keep the following data e Call Statistics e Transfer Statistics e System Events e Feature Keys Device Registration state The Automatic Firmware Update link leads you to the page where the automatic update of the Quadro s firmware software image can be configured The Download current configuration in a legible format and Uplo
140. ee se Selection The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to pickup the calls ringing on the extensions from the Pickup Group Fig Il 81 Access List of Extension page for Pickup Group The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created Main System Users Telephony Internat Uplink Network This page consists of the following components Call Type lists the available call types Access List Add Entry e PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions ute SP E e SIP calls through a SIP server address 002002 eIn apyolcom EEan e PSTN calls from global telephone network mna Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP 0092008 M i 124 Au ign aTe address or PSTN number will be parsed through the Fig Il 82 Access List of Extension Add Entry page for Pickup group Call Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list
141. een in the From field of the SMS delivered to the mobile phone SMS Recipient Address requires a destination mobile number for atest SMS SMS Gateway manipulation radio buttons allow to selected between pre defined Clickatell SMS gateway and the custom defined SMS gateways Fig Il 46 SMS Settings page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 26 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Clickatell this selection allows to use a pre defined SMS gateway Selection enables the API ID text field which indicates a Clicatell specific parameter obtained from the server and should match on both sides e Custom this selection allows to use a custom SMS gateway Selection requires following parameters to be inserted O O Resource text field requires the HTTP resource name on the SMS gateway for example http sms cgi Parameters text field requires the parameters to be submitted to the resource address The value of this field represents a string with tokens separated by percent symbols inside Each token indicates a value of the certain field on this page The value is dependent on the SMS gateway requirements For example user username amp password password amp to to0 amp from from amp text text The tokens are the strings that have the following dependencies from the field in this page username indicates the username defined in the field Username
142. eer text field requires the mailing address of the IPSec connection partner The Send button will insert Quadro s public RSA key into an e mail and send it to the IPSec connection partner Fig Il 173 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection RSA Key Settings page PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol is used to establish a virtual private network VPN over the Internet Remote users can access their corporate networks via any ISP that supports PP TP on its servers PPTP encapsulates any type of network protocol IP IPX etc and transports it over IP Therefore if IP is the original protocol IP packets ride as encrypted messages inside PPTP packets running over IP PPTP is based on point to point protocol PPP and the Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE protocol Encryption is performed by Microsoft s Point to Point Encryption MPPE which is based on RC4 L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol is a protocol from the IETF which allows a PPP session to run over the Internet an ATM or frame relay network L2TP does not include encryption as does PPTP but defaults to using IPSec in order to provide virtual private network VPN connections from remote users to the corporate LAN Derived from Microsoft s Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP and Cisco s Layer 2 Forwarding L2F technology L2TP encapsulates PPP frames into IP packets either at the remote user s PC or at an ISP that has an L2TP remote access concentrator LAC The LAC tra
143. efined in the Attached IP Lines text field Extensions Directory The Extensions Directory is a useful tool for callers to get direct access to the Quadro extensions by spelling the username with the help of the phone keypad The Extensions Directory can be accessed through Quadro s Auto Attendant Services and it has its own manipulation buttons to browse the directory The Extensions Directory Settings page allows you to make a list of names assigned to the extensions on the Quadro If the name spelled by the caller matches the one s listed in the Extensions Directory the corresponding extension user name s will be played to the caller for verifying the input and selecting the user to connect Each extension s user should record their name with the help of the handset see chapter Update System Messages or they can upload a wave file from the Account Settings page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 53 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Maan Syt Mai Teele pol cen kisene ink Motsidalk The Custom Greeting column in the Extensions Extensions Directory Settings Directory table displays whether or not a custom greeting user s name is recorded or uploaded Users cannot be accessed through the Extensions Directory and it is implied as being an inactive entry in the event a custom greeting is not recorded or uploaded Warnings will be seen in the Extensions Directory table f
144. ein Decnase Coum D Lers 190 6005 Fist Pera B01 ed Celie 1 paces em Fit iiec POM Ta Codec Pei Recekeed Packers 1266 Transmined Packets ands Recehed Packet Sire Transanitted Packet Size 160 Rx Losi Packets ti Rig Jitter i Ax Mandan Delage oo Mes Ra Delay inae Comm la epyei Tusdred om Aa Deky Decease Coun Below is the legend for Call Quality definitions on the displayed RTP Statistics excellent RX Lost Packets lt 1 amp RX Jitter lt 20 good RX Lost Packets lt 5 amp RX Jitter lt 80 satisfactory RX Lost Packets lt 10 amp RX Jitter lt 150 bad RX Lost Packets lt 20 amp RX Jitter lt 200 very bad RX Lost Packets gt 20 or RX Jitter gt 200 The Local and Remote fields indicate the two peers between which the RTP stream is transmitted The characteristics in the table below describes to the piece of RTP stream between these peers Fig Il 110 RTP Statistics page Rx Tx Codec codec for received and transmitted RTP stream respectively Rx Tx Packets number of RTP packets received and transmitted respectively Rx Tx Packet Size size of RTP packet payload received and transmitted respectively Rx Lost Packets number of lost RTP packets for received stream Rx Jitter inter arrival jitter is an estimate of the statistical variance of the RTP data packet inter arrival time measured in timestamp units The inter arrival jitter is defined to be the mean
145. el Send new wice message olikin via SMS Mites umber 0840775711 Repeatevery 1 min Meer 1 bres F Send New voice message noliicaions wia phone call Callie SIF w SiP cipooara gapio eprgLtarm Gall 10 Repestevery 1 min 1 limes a Peso datauh Mothcadon Le 6 5 ae Upload new Noticahon Message Cimedianonficaton wd Bremae zex Less Notification opfons Ristoro detaun gnewting fit Upibag miw greeting ie Comedaignestingwav Gewese Sat Back ed ee Epai Teei Le aF Fig Il 206 Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page Attention The e mail can only handle up to 3 minutes long voice mails If the voice mail is longer than 3 minutes it will be truncated and only the first 3 minutes of it will be sent to the indicated e mail address However in the e mail body the recipient will receive the information that the attached voice mail is truncated and the total length of the voice mail Please note that the voice mails longer than 3 minutes will not be removed from the voice mailbox once they are sent per e mail even if the Remove Voice Mail on send checkbox is selected This gives you a possibility to listen to the ending of the voice mail directly from your voice mailbox from the handset or by downloading it from the Web management Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 111 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note This service will work only when S
146. elect all Inverse Selection Option Name Option Value Gateways 172 30 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Domainname servers 172 30 0 1 NBT name servers 3 0 0 0 NTP servers 172 30 0 1 Domainname epygi config com Overload tftp server name 172 30 0 1 DHCP Server Statements Authoritative vologies Ltd All rights reserved Fig Il 198 DHCP Advanced Settings e The Option Value text field is used to insert the value of an option Depending on the selected Option Value Type this field should the corresponding value Warning messages will prevent saving if the value inserted in this field does not correspond to the requirements of the Option Value Type If an array should be inserted here the values should be separated with a comma Edit opens a page Edit Entry where existing DHCP server option settings can be modified This page includes the same components like the Add Entry page does The Special Devices table on this page allows you to set a static IP address binding on the MAC address of the device in the Quadro s LAN When this table is configured the devices with defined hostnames and MAC addresses will always get the same LAN IP address from the DHCP server Otherwise devices not listed in this table will get dynamic LAN IP addresses This table is also displayed in the System Configuration Wizard Add functional button opens an Add Host page where a new static MAC address binding can be defined The page consists of
147. elect the period in milliseconds when the FXS line power will be down The Ringer Type drop down list allows you to select the frequency of the ringer supported by the phone attached to the line Information can be found on the phone enclosure or in the phone s manual Problems with the ringer might occur if the ringer type selected here does not correspond to the one supported by the phone Please Note The supported ringer type can be found on the bottom of the phone in the Ren x xN value where N is the ringer type supported by the phone For example if N A the TypeA ringer type should be selected if N B the TypeB amp Z ringer type should be selected The Enable off hook Caller ID checkbox enables Caller ID transmission to the phone in the off hook state attached to a certain line Service is applicable to the phones supporting the Call Waiting Caller ID feature Information on the Caller ID system Caller ID is a service identifying the caller when performing a call or sending a voice mail and notifying the called party about the identity of the caller The Caller ID service is available only for phones with a display to show that information Two types of Caller ID notification are available on Quadro FSK and DTMF FSK Standard The FSK standard supports caller ID indication either with the phone handset on hook or if the called party is already busy with another call or operation handset is off hook For internal calls caller
148. elf Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main Syne User Telephon Hretea ned ipetiank Metal k DHCP Leases Fig Il 200 DHCP Leases page for LAN interface 108 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Registration Form The Registration Form page appears when administrating an unregistered Quadro and it has been created for customer support purposes The page requires customer registration at the Epygi Technical Support Center It provides several links offering the following registration options Register now leads to the Epygi Technical Support System ici ake a Cc TC Wg a Registration page and requires customer s information to submit the Quadro registration form Register Your Device In Technical Support Center Remind me later hides the registration notification in the Quadro through System Configuration Wizard or Internet Configuration Wizard until the next administrating activities Don t remind me more hides the registration notification forever Fig Il 201 Device Registration page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 109 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Additional Features Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking Administrator s Menus The Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking pages offer extended features for the administrator to activate incoming outgoing call bl
149. en rriro trnto tn rrr rnrn SAEENSEAEESENEEERAEEEOAEEESEAEEEERAEENOEEENSEEEEEEAEENE REENE E Ennt 99 P N E NA T a A A AAAA EAE E AA 99 Aavanced PMrewall Setting ne ne ee errr errr EEEE EEEE 100 PEro RIG e a E met entree itr met net ern rennet 100 BOT VICS FOO a E ee eed ede eee ee 102 WP POO ln ig sasmsatedaketedaknied E E E eteanieneies ed niG see iidahtaeidadadecdaaniaaeidaten 103 IDo Kole teererrr er eter ere t errr ere rere eT ere rer een et ee en ee ee ee ee 105 Network MCW sinini E ERE EEEE EEEE EE E E E KE AE AEE A a AA A EEE EAE 106 DNS SE T E A E E EEEE EEEE EE 106 DNS Server SENO eeina EEE E AEA A a EEEE EEEE ERE at ieuseassusisneisusdeuceeneuaes 106 DACP Settings Tor Ne LAN INEEN aC CE sects ceusceetavesseue ayes EEEE E EEEE 107 Pedi traton EORI aa a E E E EE EA AE E 109 Administrators Additional FEatUrES vecceusveeurerecevevevenvvrdadadaetseee eb eiadaeiwidaneeybensdenne1ieiaebae PEREA KANAE EEE EEEE 110 Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call BIOCKINO sercusrisrariseniiiinia eea a Da T a DEEE 110 Voice Mail ProfileS nuesnnnennnnrnnrrnnrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrorrrorrrr rrr trr r rrer rre rrn rrrSrEEOrEEOAENONETEEEEESEEEAEEOAEEONEEENEE EEEE EEr Ennn 110 LOO UE a rrr rrr rrr rrr rr rc rrr rr cr rr rr rrr rr rr errr rere rrr rrr ere ere rrr errr errr 113 Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s ACiMIS ll Atl critter eee atoe dined serdtdueteedesunseedtaedeues aa a adada 114 Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page ssssssssrnsrsrr
150. en trir otr rro rnnr rnr 1 Sr rErSPAEEOPNEESPREEOEEESENENEOPEEEPEEENSPNEEORNEEE REENER Ennn 53 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide AutNOr zed Prones Darapo 12a ee ae ee ee tT Tee TTT tt tt et er rT eT rr rr 54 Calk BaCk carci anes es thn ew nw Sw hs se nsw ae es se es eee eee ee oer oenaarnsae soa suwiees A 55 Tele DTO guile U ieee ees Peer eee rrr rer errr er eres rer errr rer ee ee ee en ee ee 57 AN T Stead a eta AA A A A AAA eee deta tedden dada aaa 57 RTP o COE O ec ee ee ee ee ee ee mT Te Tern a eT ene ene ene een 59 PAS PAIS ECS EEE E E E E EEE E E EE T 60 APS E e T E 60 PIP S a T E E E E E ee E E ee 61 AT AT a eO aa E O et re eee err eer ere rere 62 ame eU a A E A A E A E 64 onpoard LNE Se ING a EEE EEE EREE EEEE eer ee ee re re EEE 64 IP Line Settings ssssssnssrrsssrrrnsrrrrsrrrrorrrrrrrrrrsrrrrotnrrot rriro trnto rn rro rnnr eurr Sr rrSRNEEOPAEEERENEESENEEEESAEEES EEES RNEER REEERE EEEE Ennet 66 SUDDOMeG SIP POE aE T E A 67 Programmable Keys Conngurati o rirerire rrarena EEEO EEEE REEERE EEEE ANRA 67 De iP FAIS TEN MNS E E E A E EA E T aka nadanmaneeane mamesnennaemucmes 68 IPENONGCS LOO aiei E E re rrr 69 Loopa k a N a E E E E EE E a E E E E E errr 69 POF DESK ITO cies urtcrcic att erainieenina sna aaang denen etunsuenadgesecaaeceniguedauad EE 69 FXO SU IVS ischaemic Nh ec ae eh eae A E cich aoa ST 70 DON E cman rman E PRE PRrPCe ee e e ee e emer ore te nnn rrr eer eee 71 Sete ga se P TN Sle ha fc ae ee nn
151. er e Attached Line indicates the FXS or IP line corresponding extension it is attached to R is displayed in this column when SIP Remote Extension see below functionality is enabled on the extension e SIP Address displays the SIP address of the corresponding extension The column displays the full SIP address i e username sipserver port when the Registration on SIP Server checkbox is selected If registration is disabled the SIP address will be displayed in the following format username Proxy sipserver port If no SIP registration server or SIP server port is defined corresponding information will not be included in this column If no username is defined the extension number will be displayed instead e Percentage of System Memory indicates the user space in percentages configured for each extension The actual available duration in minutes for the extension voice mails uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages is also displayed here The available minutes corresponding to the selected user space are dependent on the Voice Recording codec selected from the Voice Mail Common Settings page For example for the same amount of marked out user space selection of the G726 voice recording codec will provide more space for voice mails and user defined voice greetings than the G711 codec selection e Call Relay indicates whether or not the the Call Relay option is enabled on the extension e Codecs column list
152. er Quadro allows the receptionist or extension user to forward incoming calls directly to the voice mail of the other attached extension To do so an appropriate routing pattern should be added to the Call Routing table Hence when transferring a call to the assigned extension incoming call will directly go to the extension s voice mailbox Multi Company Receptionist Quadro provides the possibility to use a single IP phone to manage the receptionist s features for multiple companies at the same time To do so the incoming line appearance for the phone should be created attached to the IP line of the IP phone and be labeled to the corresponding company name Being busy with a call related to one company the receptionist is able to also receive the calls related to other companies While calls are ringing in the background the receptionist can switch between the incoming calls If the receptionist does not answer the incoming calls and if the Call Queue service is enabled on the extensions the incoming calls will be stored in the queue specific for each company line Man Stem Usas Telephony Bor reed Upik Hetem k Receptionist Managment Ald Hin Oelete Selecta bases Selection The Receptionist Management page allows you to configure IP phones to be used as a receptionist on the Quadro This page contains the list of configured receptionists with information about the attached IP lines and watched extensions Fig Il 95 Receptionist
153. er ID To Configure the Line Settings Select the line number that should to be configured from the Active Lines column in the Lines table on the Line Settings page Press on the line number link in the Line Settings table The Line Settings Line page will appear in the browser window Use the Caller ID drop down list to select the caller ID detection system mode corresponding to the phone type Enable the Dialing Prefix With Caller ID checkbox if needed Configure the Remote Party Disconnect Indication parameters by selecting the corresponding checkboxes Define a Ringer Type from the corresponding drop down list Enable Off hook Caller ID if needed Press the Save button on the Line Settings Line page to save the caller ID system and other line specific configuration settings lla al a Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 65 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus IP Line Settings The IP Line Settings page is used to configure IP lines for IP phones to be connected to the Quadro Quadro provides the options to connect SIP phones to its LAN side assign the corresponding IP line to an active extension and use SIP phones as a simple phone with all telephony services of the Quadro for example call hold waiting transfer etc 8 IP Lines are available on the Quadro2x 30 IP Lines are available on the Quadro4x and 18 IP Lines are available on Quadro1 6x The IP Lines Settings
154. er certain circumstances The ISDN service allows Quadro act as a user or as a network If connected to a private PBX the Quadro should be configured in the network mode If an ISDN trunk from the CO Central Office is connected to the Quadro it should be configured as a user Quadro supports the MSN Multiple Subscriber Number service i e it can be subscribed to multiple numbers from the CO and two simultaneous calls can take place at a time The ISDN Trunk Settings page is used to configure the ISDN trunk and their signaling The number of available ISDN trunks is dependent on the type of your Quadro Quadro2xi and Quadro4xi models have only one ISDN trunk available Quadro16xi and the special edition of Quadro4xi have 3 ISDN trunks available The ISDN trunks shared on other devices if any are also listed on this page This page offers the following input options The Trunk Settings table lists the available ISDN trunks on the Quadro and their settings trunk name and interface types The Start and Stop functional links are used to start shutdown the selected ISDN trunk s When an ISDN trunk is in a shutdown state ISDN calls cannot be placed or received Mam Sytem Users Telephony Shetivet Upin Metwoth ISDN Trunk Settings The Restart functional link is used to bring channel s to the Stat Stow Restart Copyte Ttunhis Restore Dota Sateet Setectan nnee Setection initial idle state on both sides When applying one of these leans
155. er dials the pickup extension and no extensions of the pickup group are ringing the No call is available to pickup message will be played to the user When the user that is not listed in the Access List dials the pickup extension password authorization of the pickup extension will be required to answer the call When a denied user dials the pickup extension the Party does not accept your call message will be played to the user For Pickup Group extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for regular extensions see User Extension Settings described above The General Settings page has a different content as follows 1 General Settings for pickup group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components Mam System Users Telephory Bretinet Upit Netywoek Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent Extensions Management Edit Entry i General Settings 12 Password requires a password for the new extension a a The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error message will prevent making the extension
156. er name and password Main Syaten Users Teleph kman Hink Howik The Add functional button opens the Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry page where a new local AAA record can be created Fig Il 153 Local AAA Table page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 82 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry page offers a group of manipulation radio buttons to select the type of authorization and the following other parameters e Authentication by Caller ID this selection is used to set Main Syatean Users Telephony imeni Up nk Metwork Call Routing Local AAA Table Add Entry the authentication based on the caller s phone number which is considered to be automatically detected The Phone Number SIP User Name text field requires the callers phone number or the SIP username Only numeric and wildcard characters see chapter Entering SIP Addresses Correctly are allowed for this field T Y are used to define a range or a quantity of numbers For example 2 13 17 ww a c means that the dialed number may be 213 214 215 Feb E SOF bl fh 216 or 217 2ww 2a 2b and 2c to match the specified phone a number in the case of 2 3 7 the dialed number may be 23 or cee a 27 to match the specified phone number The 11 15 23 38 45 pattern means that the dialed number may be 11 15 23 Fig ll 154 Local
157. ers selected above When this button is pressed FXO Channel Usage Statistics chart appears It represents dependency between the time frame and the number of calls performed during that period Additionally it may display the maximum number of calls performed in the selected time frame The Line Status for ISDN Trunk displays the state of the B1 and B2 channels and the information about the active calls on them This page includes a group of static and dynamic parameters Static parameters are always displayed Dynamic parameters appear only when an event takes place on the channel Static Parameters e B channel the state of the channel enabled or disabled e State the current state of the channel free busy or N A Dynamic Parameters e Caller Party this parameter appears when a call is received and indicates the caller address e Called Party this parameter appears when a call is placed and indicates the destination address e Call Duration current call duration in seconds Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus epysi ean Siem Use lelap hianat iii Kelair Quadro Status Lines Status Lanes arius Fig Il 17 Line Status FXO Status page Kian ale Uiii lekephom bhnr Up FXO Channel Usage Statistics Fig Il 18 FXO Channel Usage Statistics page Mam Syo Leere lebephoey heit Lp Hataw EC GI FXO Channel Usage Statistics Tice Stetre
158. es During this time Quadro telephony and Internet access will be disabled The firmware update will cause the loss of the following data Main Syctem Users Telephorw bnie Liplink Halek Firmware update e All internally stored voice mails and custom voice seta ial atlas messages Please Note If you do not wish to lose your voice data have it downloaded from Configuration Management page All intomally Sirta vita mails and cuslim wich massages DHCP leases The fanefer Halistics Cal satiti A a LPL a Pinding events a User specht g Br Eg BEME Wl SEEE pri or to starti n g th e Fi rmware U pd ate The falling processes will be shopped in Tree system resources Wott domani d D H C P leases Neawork Time Fiotocal Daemon Network menace Stasie Deamon Transfer statistics atiii Call statistics Please Note If you consider the Call Statistics entries in the displayed tables to be important it is recommended to download them from the corresponding page prior to starting the Firmware Update Fig Il 47 Firmware Update page 1 All pending events User specific GUI states The following main processes will be stopped during the firmware update and will be restarted after the installation is completed Voice Software Network Time Protocol Daemon Network Interface Statistic Daemon Dynamic DNS Daemon Next will move you to the second page of Firmware Update where the image file should
159. es are being verified The Start Network Diagnostics button is used to initiate network diagnostics i e to check the WAN link and IP configuration to BE a verify gateway DNS primary and secondary if configured servers accessibilities System Diagnostics Start detecting VAN Protocol Reboot te Dewce The Download system logs button is used to download all logs to the local PC as a tar archive file These logs can then be used by the Epygi Technical Support Office to determine the problem that has occurred on your Quadro Start Network Oiagrosics i Stan ISON Diagnostics Dowrvioad System logs Start USS Flash Mormcey Tsang The Reboot this Device button is used to reboot the Quadro Please note that the session with the Quadro will be closed i e the Quadro GUI should be newly opened and a new login will be required afterwards For Quadro 2x 4x 16x models the Start FXO Diagnostics button runs FXO diagnostic tests to determine the optimal value for the FXO country specific regional setting CSRS appropriate to your PSTN provider Once the FXO diagnostic is complete the recommended value should be set manually on the fxocfg hidden cgi Setting this value may resolve echo or poor audio quality issues on FXO lines For Quadro 2xi 4xi 16xi models the Start ISDN Diagnostics button is used to initiate ISDN BRI low level diagnostic With these tests the ISDN physical link is checked and the Frame Synchronizati
160. es over the previous form Please Note The Local ID and Remote ID values are mandatory for RSA selection and are optional for Shared Secret selection However it is recommended to define the Local ID and Remote ID values for multiple road warrior connections PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy is a procedure of system key exchange which uses a long term key and generates short term keys as is required Thus an attacker who acquires the long term key can neither read previous messages that they may have captured nor read future ones Use IPSec Compression enables IPSec data compression This option is displayed only if the IPSec VPN partner supports it The RSA Key Management sub page is used to see the current RSA key and to generate a new one This page contains the following components The public key is displayed in the RSA Public Key text field so that the user may inform their IPSec connection partner about it for example via fax The user has the option of generating a new pair of keys by specifying the key length with the corresponding radio buttons Generate a new 1024bit RSA Key and Generate a new 2048bit RSA Key and then clicking the Generate Button A valid RSA key should fit to following requirements Man ipse fees Toip smy ppu wr pE Bnrat RSA key doesn t start with Os Sec Configuration Eihar Wa RSA key doesn t end with e RSA key contains symbols other than Alphanum The Email this to the p
161. estination number new voice mail notification options and so on Creating multiple profiles with the same name gives a wide flexibility to have different voice mail settings activated depending on which extension is called Please Note If an extension does not have a profile specified in a call routing rule or the specified profile name is incorrect the default Voice Mail Settings of the extension will be used The Voice Mail Profiles page contains a table where all Voice Mail Profiles for the corresponding extension are listed The following functional buttons are available Add opens the Add Entry page where a new Profile Name should be defined Edit opens the Edit Entry page where Voice Mail Profile settings should be defined The Voice Mail Profiles Edit Entry page is used configure the profile specific voice mail settings This page contains the following components Maximum Mail Message Duration lists the possible values for maximum mail duration counted in minutes during which a voice mail will be recorded The Unlimited selection allows voice message to be recorded as long as the user s space could hold Send new voice message via email is an option to send new voice mail files via e mail to the defined recipients Mails will be automatically converted to the Windows wave PCMU format before being attached to the e mail Checkbox activates the following input options e Email Address requires the mailing address s of
162. ets number of received broadcast packets The area Transmit Values provides the following e Transmit Bytes number of transmitted bytes o Transmit Packets number of transmitted Ethernet packets e Transmit Errors number of transmitted packets containing errors e Transmit Drop Errors number of transmitted packets that have been discarded o Transmit Carrier Errors number of transmit carrier errors that occur due to a defective or lost connection on the Ethernet link e Transmit Collisions number of transfer errors that occurred during a simultaneous packet transmission from both sides Fig Il 14 Transfer Statistics Diagram Chart To see the Transfer Statistics Diagram Charts select the desired criteria and click Save to generate the corresponding chart and the table showing the transfer statistics values if enabled The letters M millions and K thousands used in the legend of the displayed diagrams show the total number of specified criteria The Reset Statistics button is used to reset the chart and the table if enabled Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 12 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Lines Status The Quadro Status Lines Status page shows the current status of each of the FXS IP and FXO ISDN lines including details of the attached extension Since only one line of information can be displayed at a time the Line IP Line and FXO ISD
163. evice Mac DOUIES MTU 1500 Bytes DNS Server Dynamically No Routes IP Routing Configuration Configuration Management Event Settings Time Date Settings Mail Settings SMS Settings SNMP Settings System Logs Settings Features Language Pack Automatically Backup Configuration disabled Automatic Firmware Update enabled Manual server configuration Server Name ftp epygi com Server Port 21 Update Method ftp User Name anonymous Password empty Check and notify Every Day at 0 00 Display notification for all except Login and Firmware Update events Those events have Do nothing action assigned NTP Server and Client enabled Predefined NTP Server ntp1 epygi com Polling interval 6 Disabled Disabled SNMP disabled User Logging enabled Developer Logging disabled Archived Logging disabled Remote Logging disabled IP Phone support disabled 3pcc support disabled G729 support disabled QCM support disabled Default English Custom Language Pack none Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 116 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Parameter User Rights Management Extensions Management for Quadro2x and Quadro2xi Extensions Management for Quadro4x and Quadro4xi Extensions Management for Quadro16x and Quadro16xi Extension Settings General for Q
164. evices fill ED Die Setect a hese Selecting Anu ny rae 2 hasta EEE Tinie Mee cast aay mi hearr Fegipiraiio oe EF Heip Fig Il 145 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices page The Tunnels to Master Devices page consists of a table where master devices are listed with the corresponding authentication parameters Add functional button leads to the Add Entry page where a new master device parameters needs to be provided The Add Entry page consists of the following components The Enable Registration checkbox selection is used to enable the registration to the corresponding master device The Tunnel Name text field requires the SIP tunnel name for the corresponding connection System suggests you to start the SIP tunnel name with the SIP_Tunnel_ words according to the automatic prefix used for the SIP tunnels on the Quadro however this is not mandatory The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel_ The Password text field requires the authentication password Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel establishment Mam System Uses Telephony Shetivet Upit Met work SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry F Enadte Registragon Tunnel Name Fig Il 146 SIP Tunnel Sett
165. ferred to the user s voice mailbox or if no answer forwarding is enabled it will be forwarded to the corresponding destination If the call is set into the queue the caller will hear a message asking them to wait until the call will be answered Once the receptionist or extension user terminates the call the next call in the queue will ring to the user For regular FXS users indication about the callers in the queue is through the Call Waiting service see Manual IIl Extension Users Guide When a new caller arrives to the call queue the phone display if available of the phone connected to the FXS will display the total number of callers in the queue along with the name phone number of the last caller Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 50 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Extension Status Quadro provides the possibility of controlling and determining the actual state of the managers phones through the receptionist s IP phone configuration of the IP phone is done automatically by Quadro through the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard A programmable key on the receptionist s IP phone that is assigned to the corresponding manager will blink when an incoming call to the manager s phone is currently ringing The key lamp will be ON when manager is on a call and will be OFF if the manager s phone is in the idle state The extension status can be watched viewed by th
166. for this option e Monthly the calendar day should be selected for this option e Annually the calendar day and month should be selected for this option In the Available Time Period drop down lists the time range of the pattern validation should be defined Any time selected in this field will be considered corresponding to the Quadro s Time Date Settings The Custom selection provides the option to manually define the validity period s Use the following format to insert pattern cere Ta date time rule s Fig Il 152 Call Routing Wizard page 5 Month Month Month Day Day Day hh mm hh mm Please Note Established patterns based on the Emergency Codes and PSTN Access Codes Settings in the System Configuration Wizard will be marked in bold and will be placed in the first position in the Call Routing Table Additionally they cannot be modified and deleted from the Call Routing Table The Duplicate functional button is used to create a routing pattern with the settings of an exiting one This is to avoid configuring a new routing entry completely by duplicating an existing entry with different settings To use the Duplicate button only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row should be selected will appear The Duplicate button opens the Call Routing Wizard where all fields except the Pattern field are already filled in A Pattern for the new route will be required anyway The Mov
167. formed that the message has been received by the Quadro but is not yet played by the extension user The uploaded file needs to be in the PCMU wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension and gives a You do not have enough space warning Browse browses for the notification file that must be in PCMU wave format Download Notification Message appears only if a file has been uploaded previously The link is used to download the audio file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified The ZeroOut voice mail feature allows a caller that has reached the called extension s voice mailbox to accelerate the automatic redirection feature instead of leaving a message in the extension s Voice Mailbox To activate this feature the caller should dial 0 digit see Feature Codes during the voice mail greeting which invites the caller to leave a message The caller will then be automatically transferred to the destination specified in this page Enable ZeroOut checkbox selection enables the ZeroOut feature and activates the following fields to be inserted s Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types e PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant e SIP calls through a SIP se
168. functionality should be limited depending on inbound caller information Enable Set Date Time Period s checkbox if route should be functional within certain time date interval Configure Enabler Disabler Keys if you need this routing rule to be managed from the phone handset Press Next Select the user or attendant extension from the Use Extension Settings drop down list that the call will be placed on Specify the Destination Host and Port Number Username and Password if an IP or IP PSTN call type has been selected For the IP PSTN call type enable Multiple Logons if necessary Enable the Use RTP Proxy checkbox if needed Choose the Authentication and Accounting method from the AAA Required drop down list Configure Fail Reasons Configure Transport Protocol for SIP messages and SIP Privacy parameters as needed Press the Next button If the Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller ID checkbox has been previously enabled and the call type is different from the FXO fill in the Inbound Caller Pattern into the corresponding text field Choose the needed value from the Inbound Call Type drop down list as well as the Inbound Number of Discarded Symbols and Prefix values Press the Next button If IP has been selected on the previous step in the Inbound Call Type drop down list then Inbound Host should be inserted in the current page If FXO or ISDN has been selected in the Inbound Call Type drop down list then the ISDN trunk or the FXO l
169. g Il 190 IDS Log page Ain System Upas Telephenny imane Uplink Herak IDS Logs WEB CGl test cgi access Fig Il 191 IDS issue detailed preview 105 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Network Menu en olen Uses lee kdar Amk Aa DEL hengi fee Dene Setings Quadro4x Management ER REA taco rami Active Calls uF a Fe oUm 2 Tai timi Tie Tap aie P Ca Fp tiar 174673 teva gsar HI Biden ampia S0 Taming ar Va Sd ET Aram K IT 22 hep eye pom 00N Gee J007 Wan tind dee A Fig Il 193 Network menu in Plain theme Fig Il 192 Network menu in Dynamo theme DNS Settings The DNS Settings page provides the option of setting up a name server for the Quadro It offers the following components Man Seton Users Lelephory BAA Upik The Nameserver Assignment radio buttons are as follows S DNS Settings e The Dynamically by provider selection automatically configures the assignment of the name server address from the provider party e Fixed Nameserver address is a manually selected name server The Nameserver text field requires the IP address of an external name server The Alternative Nameserver text field requires the IP address of the secondary name server The Alternative Nameserver is used if the main name server cannot be accessed Fig Il 194 DNS Settings page DNS Server Settings The DNS Server on the Quadro provides the services to the hosts in the Quadro s LAN Wi
170. g them to the network The MTU preferred value is dependent on the Ethernet connection The default MTU size is 1500 Bytes for Ethernet and 1400 Bytes for PPPoE Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Man Seen Uses Telephony interned Uplink Hetweoak Internet Configuration Wizard WAN IF Configuration Cippoira P Cipbosrd PeGipinand Fig Il 9 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN IP Configuration page Main Syvtem Users Telephony batec ret Uiptink Netwoak Internet Configuration Wizard WAN Interface Configuration Fig Il 10 Internet Configuration Wizard WAN MAC Address Configuration page 10 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Status The system status window displays non editable tables providing extensive system status information about Quadro General Information Network Status Lines Status Memory Status Hardware Status SIP Registration Status IP Lines Registration Status and IP Lines Registration Status The links on this page lead to device Transfer Statistics user mailboxes and supplementary services configuration pages The System Status page has several tables providing system information General I nformation The General Information page includes the following information e Uptime duration Period Quadro is on since last reboot e Device hostname Quadro device host name f Main Syrie Users Telephon biert Uplink Het pra
171. gs Parameter Voice Mail Settings Group List Speed Calling Account Settings Caller ID Based Services Basic Services General Basic Services Hold Music Basic Services Do Not Disturb Basic Services Hotline Appendix System Default Values System Default Value Maximal mail message duration 5 min Ask password before granting local access to mail box disabled Ask password before granting remote access to mail box enabled Send welcome message disabled Play Voice Mail help enabled Automatically play messages enabled Send mails count information message disabled Send date time information message enabled Send beep at the end of message enabled Silent VM recording disabled Send new voice messages via e mail disabled Send new voice message notifications via SMS disabled Send new voice message notifications via phone call disabled Voice Mail Indication Tone indication ZeroOut enabled Redirect Call Type PBX Redirect Address 00 FAX Redirection disabled Out of Office disabled Greeting message default Profiles for Voice Mail Settings undefined No entries No entries Display Name undefined User Password Protection disabled both for incoming and outgoing calls User s Name for Extensions Directory default Custom Voice Messages default No entries in the table For Any Callers all servi
172. guration Summary ins ed m Generating glodal legible configuration tating through the administrator mfiguration Process finished Ooenioad generated configuratice View generated configurator Sahni le tht ttt tle Fig Il 38 Configuration Summary Preview page The Upload Legible Configuration page is used to upload a configuration file in a text format The Browse button in the opened page is used to browse certain legible configuration file to be uploaded and updated into the system The configuration files to be uploaded should be in the txt format otherwise a system error occurs Configuration file upload progress will be displayed in the area below Events The Events page has two tables All system events that have occurred will be displayed in one table and event settings will be displayed in the other The System Events page may be accessed through the Events link from the main menu It lists information about system events that have occurred on Quadro When a new event takes place a record is added to the System Event table For failure events priority 2 and 3 see below the warning Please check your pending events will appear at the bottom of all management pages The system events and the warning message are visible only for the administrator The warning link which leads directly to the System Events page will disappear from the management pages if the administrator has marked all new events as
173. h a call When this field has a 0 value the system uses either the timeout defined in the T302 field or the Sending Complete Information element messages to establish a call Independent on the value in this field Sending Complete Information element and the pound sign always result in call establishment The Generate Progress tone on IP checkbox selection will generate the progress tone to IP When Generate Progress Tone to PSTN PBX checkbox is selected Quadro generates ring tones to callers during ISDN call dialing This feature is mainly applicable to 2 stage dialing mode Enable CLIR Service checkbox selection enables Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR service which displays the incoming caller ID only if Presentation Indication is allowed on the remote side Otherwise if CLIR service is disabled caller ID will be unconditionally displayed When the Alternative Disconnection Mode checkbox is not selected Quadro will disconnect the call as soon as the disconnect message has been received from the peer When the checkbox is selected Quadro s user may hear a busy tone when peer has been disconnected Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 73 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Override CLID with P Asserted Identity checkbox selection enables SIP P Asserted Identity support For the calls from SIP to ISDN if Invite SIP message contains a P Asserted lIdentity then
174. he Auto Attendant to the routing mode Any inserted digits on the Auto Attendant prompt will be parsed through the Routing Table on the Quadro Redirection on Timeout this group allows automatic AEN E PESEE T E wee call redirection in case no action has been performed m a by the caller The group offers the following options ae Enable Redirection on Timeout checkbox is used to enable disable the automatic call redirection Recurring Attendant Prompt Repetition Count text field indicates the number of Recurring Attendant Prompts to be consecutively played to the caller with no action from his her side When the Recurring Attendant Prompt is played the number of times indicated in this text field the call will be automatically redirected to the defined destination Call Type drop down list includes possible CEEA AN incoming call types PBX PSTN SIP or Auto PBX ES er selection means that the call will be redirected to the local extension SIP selection means that the call will be redirected to the SIP destination correspondingly PSTN selection means that the call will be redirected to the PSTN destination Auto selection is used for undefined call types destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing Call To text field requires the destination number dialed in the format depending on the selected Call Type The wildcard is supported in this field Shape ge p
175. he Best Matching Algorithm will stop after executing step 3 as no new sub lists are formed The resultant list of prioritized patterns will be the following The prioritized list 1231 1 1 3 3 0 8 100 150 asd 1 123 2271 1 3 12 31 123 11 15 3 a 4 1 3 Vol P Carrier Wizard The VoIP Carrier Wizard is used to define access codes for available VoIP Carrier accounts which will particularly allow you to reach users over IP PSTN providers or to call to the peers registered on the certain SIP servers by dialing simple digit combinations For each configured VoIP carrier the wizard creates a specific IP PSTN routing rule in the Call Routing table This entry is available to PBX users only which means only PBX users can make calls to the corresponding VoIP carrier Additionally a virtual extension automatically generated in Extensions Management will be registered on the defined VoIP Carriers SIP server The settings of that extension will be used to make calls from Quadro s users towards the created VoIP Carrier will be placed Mam Sye Users Telephony VoIP Carrier Wizard Select VolP Carle Vol Caner Vonage Mac Sysdonage VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 1 provides a following option of describing the VoIP carrier e When predefined carrier is selected in the VoIP Carrier drop down list the SIP Server and Port will be already predefined in the next page Manual selection allows you to ma
176. he Fail Reason configuration on the corresponding pattern The Restrict the Number of Simultaneous Calls checkbox is only available for IP PSTN call type and is used to restrict the number of simultaneous calls to the public SIP server with the same username at the same time This checkbox enables Allowed Call Count text field which requires the number of simultaneous calls allowed in a range from 1 to 64 If you leave this field empty no limitation will apply to the number of simultaneous logons The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is available for SIP and IP PSTN call types and is applicable when a route is used for calls through Quadro between peers that are both located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected RIP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers The AAA Required checkboxes are used to choose one or more of the following Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA settings Local Authentication with this checkbox selected callers will need to pass authentication through the Local AAA table see below when dialing the current pattern e RADIUS Authentication and Authorization this checkbox is present when a RADIUS client is enabled With this checkbox selected callers will need to pass the authentication through RADIUS server see above when dialing the current pattern The RADIUS Accounting checkbox is accessib
177. he Firewall Configuration page offers the following components The Enable IDS checkbox selection enables the Intrusion Detection System The Enable NAT checkbox selection enables Network Address Translation The Enable Firewall checkbox selection enables the firewall security service The firewall security level has to be selected Man Sem Users Taho Damu NON otherwise the firewall cannot be enabled Firewall Configuration The Firewall Security radio buttons are the following e Low Security Everything that is not explicitly forbidden will be allowed This security level doesn t block anything by default It is recommended if the device is already located behind another firewall or if every filter has been configured correctly e Medium Security Traffic originating from the LAN side may pass and traffic from the WAN side will be blocked by default This is the recommended security level e High Security Everything that is not explicitly allowed will be blocked including traffic from the LAN side The Advanced Firewall Settings link refers to the page where Quadro s privacy can be configured x i f Fig Il 180 Firewall and NAT Settings page The View Filter Rules link opens the Filtering Rules page j or Advanced Firewall Settings Advanced Firewall Settings are used to deny Ping and Portscanning operations addressed towards the device With these features enabled Quadro will answer with inscrutable messages
178. he Programmable Keys Configuration page where programmable keys for the corresponding IP phone can be configured The Reboot link in the Details column appears for supported IP phones and is used to remotely initiate a reboot of an IP phone attached to the line Supported SIP Phones e The following is the list of SIP phones that can be automatically configured to work with Quadro IP PBXs e SNOM 300 SIP phone e Aastra 9480i 35i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 300SIP e SNOM 320 SIP phone e Aastra 51i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 330SIP e SNOM 360 SIP phone e Aastra 53i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 501SIP e SNOM 370 SIP phone e Aastra 55i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 550SIP e SNOM 820 SIP phone e Aastra 57i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 601SIP e Aastra 480i SIP phone e Aastra 480e analog phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 650SIP e Aastra 9133i SIP phone e Grandstream BT100 e Polycom SoundStation IP 6000 e Aastra 9112i SIP phone e Grandstream BT200 e Aastra 9143 33i SIP phone e Grandstream GXP2000 e Programmable Keys Configuration e The Programmable Keys Configuration page is used to assign a function to the programmable keys of the IP phone The design of this page depends on the IP phone model e Independenily on the IP phone model this page contains a number of the programmable keys and Functionality drop down list assigned to each of them Main Sysiem Users Telaphony interne
179. he SMTP host needs to be configured to enable voice message transmission System Mail Settings SMTP Port requires the SMTP host port number z Mam System Users Telephony FAri ivet Uptne Metwotk Mail Sender Address text field requires the source address for the Quadro notification emails The email address defined here should be an existing valid e mail address registered on the selected SMTP server or it should have permission to use that particular SMTP server for e mail transmission Mail Recipient Address text field requires an active e mail address where system emails will be delivered The e mail recipient here can be a Quadro administrator or someone responsible for network and system problems Mail Recipient Address CC text field requires an active email address where a carbon copy CC of the system emails will be delivered Fig Il 45 System Mail Settings page Enable SMTP Authentication must be selected if the specified SMTP server requires authentication In this case authentication User Name and Password configured on the SMTP server should be defined in the corresponding text fields Attention The following symbols are not allowed for the Password field 1 7 amp Vv Send Test Mail is used to initiate a test e mail transmission This button will be enabled if correct values have been submitted and saved on this page To configure the System Mail Enable the system mail sending by the Enable chec
180. he password is not factory reset safe Local Administrator can have permission to adjust each GUI page Extension this account refers to all extensions created on the Quadro The password for default extensions is not factory reset safe but is contained in the backed up configuration Permissions for an extension to access each GUI page can be adjusted here The User Rights Management page consists of two pages The Users page is used to manage the available users on the Quadro The Roles page is used to assign the corresponding permissions to the users Mam Syeiem lets Telephony iiare Upri Hetweonk la c y s User Rights Management The Users page contains a table where the Administrator and Local Administrator users are listed This page allows them to oe modify the passwords of available users in the table and to manage the Local Administrators account The following functional buttons are available on this page The Change Password functional button is used to change the password of the Administrator and Local Administrator user s account Select one of the available users in the table by toggling the corresponding checkbox and press Change Password to open the corresponding page Fig Il 63 Users page at User Rights Management Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 34 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Change Password page is used to change the user s password It offers
181. hentication User Name requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should be provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested for some SIP servers only For Extensions Management Edit Entry others the field should be left empty Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network SIP Advanced Settings 11 Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP SIP Setting registration server accessibility to the verification mechanism SA l Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts for the SIP eee registration server accessibility verification If no reply is received from the primary SIP server within this timeout the Secondary SIP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will resume being sent to it Advanced Settings Name S1khledki29 3iqkidisa 4e SIP Old Hold Method Onflboumd Proxy Go To User Settings The RTP Priority Level drop down list is used to select the priority low medium or high of the RTP packets sent from a NES corresponding extension RTP packets with higher priority will re ree panrpeas be sent first in case of heavy traffic Port 5060 Go lo Line Settings Port 5041 Outbound Proxy for Secomdary SIP Server The Do Not Use SIP Old Hold Method checkbox enables the ORSR n new recommended method of call hold in SIP in which case the is vr hold request is indicated with the a sendonly media attribute rather than with the IP address of
182. hind the PPTP L2TP tunnel P Chpboard Route To requires the IP address range of the possible peers behind the PPTP L2TP tunnel whereto the IP packets should be routed Fig Il 33 Add VPN Route page The Enable and Disable functional buttons are used to activate or to deactivate the selected route s At least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear To Add an IP Static Route Select the IP Static Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the IP Static Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Enter the destination IP address and subnet mask in the Route To text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previously entered IP address Enter the router IP address into the Via IP Address text fields Press the Save button to make the static route with these settings ee eS Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 18 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus To Add an IP Policy Route Select the IP Policy Routes link on the Routing Configuration page Press the Add button on the IP Policy Routes page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Specify the policy routing rule priority in the Priority text field Enter the packet source IP address and subnet mask in the From text fields Use the IP Clip button to select a previously entered I
183. ic IP addresses to the devices in its LAN YANS Server 0 i i 0 IP Clipboard Give leases only to hosts listed in the static MAC address binding table checkbox enables the DHCP services only for the devices listed in the table below With this checkbox selected no DHCP services will be provided to the other devices Special deveces Add Edm Delkte Select all inverse Selection WES FE BY Ys 172301015 Please Note When this checkbox is selected all IP phones configured to use plug and play or auto configuration services brd see IP Line Settings will keep their IP addresses received from Can Oa the DHCP server of the Quadro The IP phones that are essmisityzo0s200 enon temnsienies t configured manually should be added to the Special Devices Fig 1197 DHCP Settings page for LAN interface table to keep their IP addressed 11S SESOROF 172 30 10 100 IP Address Range defines a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to the Quadro LAN users The IP range must be at least 6 otherwise the error message Address Range too small will prevent it from being saved The error message Address Range too large will appear if the IP range is greater than 254 WINS Server defines a WINS server IP address for the Quadro LAN users The DHCP Advanced Settings link leads to the page where the advanced options of the Quadro s DHCP server can be configured The page is used to modify the advanced options of the Quadro s DHC
184. ied in the Ringing Simulation Timeout text field 2 SIP Settings This group is used to configure extension s SIP registration settings and consists of the following components User Name requires a user name for the extension registration on the SIP server The registration user name needs to be unique on the SIP server and it is displayed on the called phone Extensions Management Edit Entry when performing an IP call Mam SAna Users elem imene Lp Hefenik SIP Registration Settings 11 Password indicates the password for the extension registration on a SIP server izor hamin Toe Provan Registration Password is used to confirm the password If the aama a Sorapa seeseas entered password does not correspond to the one entered in the licensing O arae sip pyle Password field the error message The passwords do not ii match Please try again will appear ee a ee SIP Server indicates the host address of the SIP server The Go To User Satinas field is not limited regarding symbol usage or length It can be carinii either an IP address such as 192 168 0 26 or a host address such as Sip epygi com Fig Il 73 Extensions Management Edit Entry SIP Settings page SIP Port indicates the host port number to connect to the SIP server The SIP server port may only contain digit values otherwise the error message SIP Server Port is incorrect will be displayed when applying the extension settings If the SIP
185. if any and their settings If the FXO service has been disabled the Allowed Call Type Route Incoming Call to and PSTN number columns are set to N A Clicking on the FXO line number will open the FXO Settings FXO page where the FXO line settings may be modified If having External PSTN Gateways service is enabled and the local Quadro provides its FXO lines to the remote device no FXO lines settings can be modified on the local Quadro In this case all shared FXO lines can only be configured from the remote device Any modifications in the shared FXO line s settings on the master Quadro will immediately be reflected Fig I 131 EXO Settings page in the FXO Settings table on the slave Quadro The Enable FXO checkbox selection activates FXO support for the selected FXO line The Allowed Call Type is used to choose the allowed call directions for the corresponding FXO line The administrator may choose between e Enabling incoming calls prohibiting outgoing calls for the selected FXO line e Enabling outgoing calls prohibiting incoming calls for the selected FXO line e Enabling both incoming and outgoing calls for the selected FXO line The Route incoming FXO Call to manipulation radio buttons group allows you to define the destination where incoming calls addressed to the corresponding FXO line will be forwarded to Extension this selection allows you to choose the local SEn ea ee a _ Se ee PBX user or auto atte
186. iguration Wizard allows the administrator to configure the WAN interface settings and to adjust Quadro s connectivity with an external network The Internet Configuration Wizard MUST be run for Quadro to be connected to the Internet All the settings of the Internet Configuration Wizard are described in the chapters below except those for the IP settings which will be described in this chapter Please Note It is strongly recommended not to change the factory default settings if their meanings are not fully clear to an administrator Mien Sytem Users Telephony k sni Uplink Met work Cal 7 Y SI internet Configuration Wizard Gatting Started L for Protecels PPPoE and PPPoA I for Protocol PPTP col Ethernet Pere J barter i it PPP E F i k Fig Il 7 Internet Configuration Wizard Start page The Wizard allows navigating through the following basic configuration parameters and settings e Uplink configuration see below For WAN Interface protocol PPPoE For WAN Interface protocol PPTP For WAN Interface protocol Ethernet e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN IP Configuration see below e WAN IP Configuration e WAN Interface Configuration see below e PPP PPTP Settings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Settings e WAN Interface Configuration see below e DNS Settings e DNS Settings The Switch to Auto Provisioning link moves you to the Automatic Provisioning page where Quadro
187. ill be displayed on the administrator Main Menu page if new system events exist The link leads to the Events page that can be also accessed from the System menu The list of Users currently logged into the system is seen in the lower right corner of the Administrator s Main Menu Information about IP address user accessed Quadro GUI from the username user is logged in and the time until the next automatically logout is provided herein The current version of the Quadro s firmware and of its boot loader is also available here The idle session timeout is set to 20 minutes If no action is performed during that time user will be automatically moved to the Login page and will be requested to login again The link Refresh in occurs in the upper right corner beside the field displaying the number of seconds until the next refresh and is used to perform a manual reload of the page If a page with a Refresh counter is left opened the session time out counter will be updated periodically and the logout timeout will never expire Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 5 Quadro Manual II Administrator s Guide Quadro s Graphical Interface Recurrent Buttons Throughout this guide you will see a variety of recurrent buttons Below is a description of these buttons This button leads back to the previous eae This button returns you to the page you were page of a fixed sequence of pages used previously on mainly in wizard
188. ill be used to set up a call If several patterns have been found to match the number the Quadro uses the Best Matching Algorithm to prioritize the matching patterns Once the patterns are prioritized the pattern with the highest priority will be used as a preferred route for call setup The successive patterns will be used only if the destination specified by a higher priority pattern is unreachable To prioritize the matching patterns the following criteria are sequentially applied to matching patterns The criteria are ordered by their priorities Each consecutive criterion is calculated only for the patterns that take the same value for the preceding criteria that is Criterion 3 is calculated only for patterns that take the same value for Criterion 1 and Criterion 2 Criterion 1 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 Criterion 4 Criterion 5 Criterion 6 Criterion 7 Criterion 8 Criterion 9 Criterion 10 The presence of asterisks in a pattern Ow The patterns without have a higher priority The total number of matching digits symbols inside and outside the braces brackets The more matching digits a pattern contains the higher its priority The number of matching digits symbols outside the braces brackets The more matching digits outside braces brackets a pattern contains the higher its priority Please note This criterion is used only if several patterns take an equal but non zero value for Criterion 2
189. ime and Date Settings page The Move Up and Move Down functional buttons are used to sort NTP servers in the order they need to be accessed If the EE LES BS ees E eS NTP server in the first position of the SNTP Servers table does not answer NTP server in the next position will try to be AOE SNIA ee reached Please Note You can add another NTP server to the list if the Orona p defined NTP servers are not functional for example Quadro s C weames irna oroc comau aa O E date time is not being updated automatically Cej eee ci Polling Interval indicates the time interval for the periodical synchronization between the timeserver and Quadro It counts in hours Fig Il 44 Add NTP Server page Attention Time and Date Settings will be reset if Quadro has lost power Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 25 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mail Settings The System Mail Settings page allows you to send warnings automatically about the board status or problems to the administrator System events that require email notification are selected on the Events page System mail must be enabled and the SMTP server needs to be configured for voice message transmission to the extension user s mailing account Enable enables system mail sending and voice messages transmission to the extension user s mailbox SMTP Host requires the SMTP host IP address or domain name T
190. in the Attached IP Lines text field This checkbox enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The Use Kickback checkbox enables the kickback service on the corresponding receptionist When this service is enabled if receptionist transfers the incoming calls to the extension and if there is no answer or if the called extension is busy on another call the call is returned to the receptionist s phone instead of getting into Voice Mail Service or being disconnected To use this service receptionist should simply transfer the incoming call to the local extension In case of no answer or busy the call will automatically get back to the receptionist When this service is not enabled the incoming call will reach the Voice Mail Service or the call queue of the called extension depending on the extension user s configuration 1 gt FEDVOI Main Syshem Usira Tisphney Iter rest Uplink Ha hawrork eel O Duso Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules Enable expansion module If you have selected the 55i 57i Snom 360 or Grandstream Expansion modules count 1 I GXP2000 IP phones from the Phone Model drop down list the next page in the wizard will be the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules For all other phone models this page is skipped For Snom 360 and Grandstream GXP2000 IP pho
191. ine number should be selected here If the Set Date Time Period s checkbox has been selected on the first page pressing Next will open the Date Time Rules page where route validity should be defined Press the Finish button to establish a local route with the inserted settings To create a local AAA eniry one ee Click on the Local AAA Table link on the Call Routing page Press the Add button on the Local AAA Table page Choose the Authentication type Enter the Phone Number or the Username and Password depending on the selected Authentication type Use the Expiration Date and Time checkbox to enable the expiration timeout Select the Expiration Date and Time from the corresponding drop down lists Press Save to apply these settings Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 83 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Allowed Characters and Wildcards The following is the set of characters and wildcards allowed in the Pattern and Inbound Caller Pattern text fields of the Call Routing Wizard Characters 0 a A 9 Z Z _ amp 1 26 0 Please Note The symbols and should be prefixed with a slash if they are used as ordinary characters otherwise the system will interpret them as wildcards Please Note The symbols and are used to define a range of characters and cannot be used as ordinary ch
192. ined in the routing rule responsible for PBX calls distribution to the local extensions Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Bni Peco piii Wei Esteem Suppanen Senaces Caller ID Based Services for SIP 1920287 sip epygl com Extension 11 Hiding Galar inteerrsaboe migming Cal piecking anpi Col these eit ieg Digiti Bini aha iid PAET k Eran Berii Send Mestage lo Callor Party 1 Pretect this entry CI Restore Getault Bietking Message File Upload Hew Glocking Message Fila Cclmedisedocking way Dice Dee ET BOE king aI aa fave Rack Cape hig ior Cosi Tantei ce Lid AB righrin rage rene Fig 11 202 Main Voice Mail Your Erlemann Supplementary berite Voice Mail Settings Extension 11 Maximum mail message duration m n Ask passaii bof ne granting l ca acoess 14 mail bir Voine Mal Indicabon Las H p indc ti ask padewond before granting remote dciis to mail Eii W Lamp inedecarboin y Send weloome message he Enable erocut e Play Voit Mail Piip Redirect call ton k Autcenalically play messages l Redirect ammessa MO C Send mails cowl information mesaage El Sard datetime information message Grable Fan Redrecton E Send beep atthe end of massage Redingel bo axhercion Sibert Wl tirdi rs ca w Enab hut Li Oat gna iw wilo messagi wa tii Sina biw wolii MSS eS Aa derail Clrestore duiun out of E mail address dianageppgicom
193. ing Calls To drop down list allows you to select an extension or Auto Attendant on the Quadro where incoming calls from the configured VoIP Carrier should be routed to For the selected extension there will be an unconditional forwarding set up which will care for incoming calls forwarding from the VoIP carrier to the corresponding extension The Failover to PSTN checkbox selection will route the call to the PSTN through local FXO line in case the VoIP Carrier is not available When this checkbox is selected an additional entry will be added to the Call Routing table This maintains digit transmission to the local PSTN when an IP call towards the configured VoIP Carrier cannot be established Please Note A warning message will appear when the defined Access Code already exists in the Call Routing table or causes a conflict with entries already in the Call Routing table In this case when continuing through the VoIP Carrier Wizard the existing entry in the Call Routing table will automatically be overwritten by the new settings Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main System Use Telephony Meet eet Up Metiiork VoIP Carrier Wizard VolP Carrier Access Code Preagug Fig Il 157 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 3 88 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide RADIUS Client Settings RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service specifies the RADIUS protocol used for authentication authorizati
194. ing application is configured to handle incoming calls on the Quadro Once the incoming call occurs Quadro is trying to transfer the call to the call controlling application If the call controlling application does not response within the mentioned timeout Quadro will answer the call or perform an action configured for unanswered incoming calls This setting is dependent on the network conditions therefore consult with your network administrator before changing the default value The read only Feature Key text field indicates whether the feature key for the 3PCC Support is installed on the system The system will not accept connections from 3PCC applications if no key is found The 3PCC support is an optional feature and can be activated with a feature key from the Features page The read only WAN Port text field indicates whether there is a filtering rule specified for the Call Control Access If a third party call control application connects to the Quadro from the WAN interface a filtering rule for the corresponding host should be created on the Call Control Access page to allow the application a remote access Creating a filtering rule is not required if the firewall is not setup on the Quadro The field shows Opened if there is at least one enabled filtering rule for the Call Control Access RTP Streaming Channels The RTP Streaming Channels page is used to configure channels where the broadcast RTP streams are transmitted These channels may be
195. ings Tunnels to Master Devices Add Entry page The Master device IP text field requires the IP address of the master device The Master device port text field requires the SIP port number of the master device The Registration State field displays information whether the slave device is registered on the master or not The Registration Date Time field displays the time and the date of last registration on the master s device Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x V7 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Call Routing The Call Routing service simplifies the calling procedure for Quadro users i e different types of calls internal SIP PSTN or IP PSTN can be placed in the same way SIP registration is not needed for extensions to make routing calls The Call Routing page offers the following components e When the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing Main System Users Telephony kaeret Upik Metwvorh checkbox is disabled for all incoming SIP calls Quadro will first search the incoming SIP address in the Extensions Call Routing Management table If found the incoming SIP call will ring on the corresponding extension If not found Quadro will look for a matching routing rule in Call Routing table When the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing checkbox is enabled for all incoming SIP calls Quadro will directly look for a matching routing rule in Call Ro
196. ion enabled Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 79 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enabler Key and Disabler Key text fields request digit combination which should be dialed from the handset or Auto Attendant to enable or disable the certain routing rules in the Call Routing Table You can set the same Enabler Disabler Key for multiple routing rules the same key may be used as enabler for one routing rule and as disabler for another one this will allow managing several routing rules with the single key ie tiem Ga Call Routing Wizard The second page of the Call Routing Wizard offers different components depending on the Call Type selected on the a TA a iy previous page Use Extension Settings drop down list is applicable to SIP and IP PSTN call types and allows you to select the extension also Auto Attendant on behalf of the call that will be placed The SIP settings of the selected extension will be used as the caller information If an entry is not selected from this list the original caller information will be kept When Keep original DID checkbox is selected the called destination will receive the Original caller s information and not the information of the extension selected from the Use Extension Settings list When the checkbox Add Remote Party ID is selected the Remote Party ID parameter is being delivered to the destination side upon call establishment pr
197. irtual extension The phone becomes no more assigned to your extension and is now available for other users to login and use it Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 69 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus FXO Settings The FXO Settings are used to configure the FXO support that allows Quadro to connect to other PBXs or analog telephone lines The number of available FXO ports is dependent on the type of your Quadro Quadro2x has only one FXO port available Quadro4x has two FXO ports available Quadro16x and the special edition of Quadro4x have 4 FXO ports available The FXO Settings also gives you the option to limit incoming or outgoing calls for the selected FXO line if required Depending on the Quadro model several FXO ports will be available on the board thus giving you the option connect several PSTN lines to the Quadro and to use them simultaneously The administrator may assign a default recipient for each FXO line where calls from the Central Office PSTN will be routed The assigned recipients become the Quadro default users If the Quadro Auto Attendant has been selected as a default user a caller from the PSTN needs to go tau System E termed Uptre _Hetwerh through the attendant menu to reach the desired extension FXO Settings The FXO Settings page lists the available local FXO lines shared FXO lines on the remote devices
198. is applicable for multiple connections selected at the same time The PPTP Server Configuration page is used to configure the PPTP server settings and offers the following components The PPTP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address Be ooro Toona ORN aN range for the PPTP server and clients within the PPTP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict PPTP L2TP Configuration the possible number of clients for the PPTP connection nenetcns EPID hanes Comtammtenn LIN Please Note The first address specified in the PPTP Subnet tl eae will be assigned to the PPTP server others will be assigned to inahnenicaton Gncxyption the clients The PPTP server subnet should be different from the L2TP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error message will appear The Authentication manipulation radio buttons are used to select the corresponding authentication protocol by which the client communicates with the server The MSCHAPv2 selection enables Encryption drop down list where the encryption method can be selected Fig Il 177 PPTP Server Configuration page The L2TP Server Configuration page is used to configure the L2TP server settings and provides the following input options The L2TP Subnet text fields are used to enter the IP address S08 LS ENE a SOI Cerys range for the L2TP server and clients within the L2TP tunnel The value specified for the subnet mask is fixed to 24 to restrict the pos
199. is option should only be selected if the peer is not working properly and cannot handle requests from PPPD for IPXCP negotiation Fig Il 167 Advanced PPP Settings page VPN Configuration A VPN Virtual Private Network is established to connect two local networks intranets securely over the Internet securely The VPN routers manage authentication between servers and clients and handle data encryption for the connection Only authorized users may access the network and the data exchange cannot be intercepted VPN connections are in many ways like every Internet connection they are based on IP addresses which means the concerned VPN gateways must authenticate the IP addresses of their respective partner s VPN gateways Each time a specific VPN is to be established usually the same IP addresses are expected This will not create problems if both VPN partners have fixed WAN IP addresses There may be circumstances reasons to prefer dynamically allocated IP addresses To enable devices that use a variable IP address as part of a VPN they are turned into Road Warriors For example at this point they are able to reach their corporate network via authentication at the company s VPN gateway device This VPN gateway device must have a fixed IP address for Internet access Every VPN needs at least one VPN gateway with a fixed IP address The partner devices of a VPN must have different WAN IP addresses and if they are connected to local area
200. is selected on the first page of the ISDN Wizard these two checkboxes are replaced with a TEI Address text field that requires the channel number digit values from 0 to 63 for connection establishment between the CO and the ISDN client Channel Selection is used to select between the Preferred and Exclusive B channel selection methods For Preferred channel selection the CO answers to the call request by the first available timeslot With the Exclusive channel selection the CO should feedback only by the timeslot asked in the call request The Bearer Establishment Procedure drop down list allows selecting the session initiation method on the B channel One of the following options can be selected for the transmission path completion prior to receipt of a call acceptance indication e on channel negotiation at the destination interface e on progress indication with in band information e oncall acceptance The Calling Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the origin of call The Called Party Type of Number drop down list allows you to select the type identifying the subaddress of the called party of the call The Called Party Numbering Plan and Calling Party Numbering Plan drop down lists correspondingly indicate the numbering plan of the called party s and calling party s number The Incoming Called Digits Size text field indicates the number of received digits in a range from 0 to 255 required to establis
201. ist is used to select the portion size of the call statistics including all types of call statistic i e successful missed and unsuccessful outgoing call statistics in the timing order which will be downloaded to the server or send per email The number selected in this drop down list indicates the number of entries in the single downloaded call statistics file If there are no enough entries in the call statistics table on the Quadro the system will wait until the necessary number of entries will be collected and then will upload the statistics file to the server or send it to the email address Fig Il 108 Call Statistics Automatically Download page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 57 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The following group of manipulation radio buttons allows you to select whether the call statistics files will be delivered by email or stored in some location on the server e The Send via Email radio button is used to send the call statistics files via email The selection enables Email Address text field that requires the email address of the administrating person to receive the call statistics files e The Send to Server radio button is used to store the call statistics files on a remote server This selection enables the following fields to be inserted The Server Name requires the IP address or the host name of the remote server The Server Port
202. ists of General Settings Attendant Scenario SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages The SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages are the same as Mam System Users Tebephony mernet Uplink Hetwork epyzi for the regular extensions described above The General E Settings and Attendant Scenario pages are described below Extensions Management Edit Entry 1 General Settings for attendant extension comatseins General Settings 00 This group requires personal extension information and has the mise following components ARG nari Display Name is an optional parameter used to define the Auto Attendant s description Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent With the Enable FAX Forwarding checkbox enabled the system moves the incoming FAX to the selected extension if a FAX tone is detected on the Auto Attendant Fig Il 88 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for Auto Attendant page The Extension to forward drop down list is used to choose the extension where the incoming FAX addressed to the Quadro s Auto Attendant will be forwarded The list contains only those extensions that have FAX support enabled FAX support can be enabled from the Extension Codecs page Please Note FAX forwarding is applicable only for incoming calls from PSTN and IP networks It is not valid for PBX calls With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled
203. it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing The Caller Address text field requires the caller s SIP address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly or PSTN number to be added to the trusted phones list The PSTN number length depends on the area code and phone number The wildcard is supported in this field If the caller address already exists in the Authorized Phones Database the error message The record already exists appears when selecting the Save button Fig Il 104 Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page The Login Extension drop down list provides all existing extensions on the Quadro When calling the Quadro Auto Attendant a trusted user will automatically be logged in as the selected extension i e the extension number and its password will be automatically submitted by the Quadro system The trusted user will directly access the Quadro Auto Attendant services The SIP settings of the login extension will be used when making IP calls The Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox enables direct access for the trusted user to the Quadro Auto Attendant Call Relay menu If the checkbox is not selected a trusted caller will be directed to the Auto Attendant s main menu but will still be able to reach Remote Access Voice Mailbox of the specified extension and Call Relay services see Feature Codes with no authentication Please Note Login Extension drop down list and Auto
204. ivate a selected route s At least one route should be selected in order to use these functions otherwise the following error message will appear No record s selected The Add IP Static Route page offers the following components Route To requires the IP address and subnet mask for the destination the IP packet should be forwarded to Via IP Address requires the IP address of the subsequent router for IP packet forwarding to the specified destination Attention The rule with the longest subnet smallest IP range will take effect when having two or more IP Static routing rules with the coinciding subnets Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Main Syste Users Telephorsy tneinet Upik Network IP Static Routes IP Static Rosis IPP de 2 jis Enae Depetee Add ton Delete Select al Imoret Setecton Route t 15552 71 074 UNAU disabled 192 100 75 0 24 Back Man System Users Telephon mrernet Uplink Network Add IP Static Route na iP Adds 192 188 755 1921987624 172 30 59 54 Fig Il 28 IP Static Routing table Ccpysgi Fig Il 29 Add IP Static Routing page 17 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus IP Policy Routes allow IP packets forwarding to the specified router depending on the source IP address as well as defining the priority for the current routing rule The IP Policy Routes table displays all specified IP policy routes with thei
205. k to the Users List in the Call Routing table The Users List page contains a list of authorized users defined from the Local AAA Table and gives the option to enable disable authentication of each user for a particular route Since the Call Routing Table may have multiple entries that could match to same pattern the table will be internally rearranged according to the rules with the following consequences e The pattern matching best to the Best Matching Algorithm will have the higher position in the rearranged list e f multiple patterns equally match to the Best Matching Algorithm the pattern with the lower metric will get the higher position in the rearranged list e If the multiple patterns with the same metric have been matched to the Best Matching Algorithm the pattern in the higher position in the table will get the higher position in the rearranged list The pattern in the highest position of the rearranged list will be considered as the preferred one The second and subsequent matching patterns will be used if the destination refused the call due to the configured Fail Reason The Enable Disable functional buttons are used to enable disable the selected route s Disabled routes will have no effect Enabled routes will be parsed when initiating routing calls The State column in the Call Routing Table displays the current state of the routes enabled disabled Add starts the Call Routing Wizard where a new routing rule may be define
206. kbox selection Update or set the SMTP host in the SMTP Host text field Update or set the e mail sender address in the Mail Sender Address text field Update or set the e mail address in the Mail Recipient Address text field Enable SMTP Authentication if it is required on the server Insert into the corresponding text fields an authentication User Name and User Password defined by your SMTP server Press the Save button to submit these settings Use the Send Test Mail button to send a test e mail with the configured settings lll Lal aaa la SMS Settings Man Stem Users Teleplein bieria Uhh Neteaath SMS Settings The SMS Settings are used to configure the SMS parameters that will allow Quadro to send the voice mail notifications or event notifications via SMS to the extension user s mobile phone Every extension user can enable voice mail notifications when a new voice mail is received and they can to define their own mobile numbers from the Voice Mail Settings or to set the certain Events notification to be delivered per SMS However for Quadro to deliver SMS notifications the SMS service should be enabled and SMS settings should be configured from this page Enable SMS Service enables the SMS service on the Quadro User Name and Password text fields require the authentication settings of the SMS server SMS Sender Address requires the source address for the Quadro notification SMS The address defined in this field will be s
207. l Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here For the Auto call type a routing pattern needs to be defined Upload new call queue welcome message allows updating the active Call Queue welcome message played when a caller joins the extension s call queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue welcome message functional link appears only when the custom call queue welcome message is already uploaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Upload new call queue message allows updating the active call queue message played when a caller is being held in the queue downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The Remove call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already uploaded and is used to remove it and restore the default call queue welcome message The Download call queue message functional link appears only when the custom call queue message is already up
208. l by clicking on No I P Pool The Manage IP Pool Groups link opens the IP Pool Configuration page The IP Pool table is the list of all added groups and the members assigned to these groups If a group is empty EMPTY will be Main System Users Teteptrecty aonet Up nh Network indicated in the Members column If hidden group members will still remain active but HIDDEN will be displayed in the Members IP Pool Configuration column mis zi The IP Pool Configuration is used to add groups of IP addresses that have the same restriction criteria When adding a new filtering rule groups may be used instead of several IP addresses IP Pool Configuration offers the following components View makes hidden groups visible Hide makes group members hidden and adds the HIDDEN Fig Il 186 IP Pool Configuration page comment in the member column g g pag Add opens the Add Group page where a new group may be added This page consists of the Group Name text field requiring the group name and the Group Description text field requiring the optional group description as well as standard Save and Back buttons to apply or abort changes Edit opens the Edit Group page where the service parameters can be modified It provides the same components as the Add Group page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise the error message One row must be selected will appear Main Sete Users Ick pian karinei p nk Beniak Please
209. le when the RADIUS Client is enabled With this checkbox selected no authentication will take place but CDRs call detail reports of the calls made through this routing record will be sent to the RADIUS server This checkbox selection enables the Client Code Identification checkbox e f the authentication is configured based on the callers address callers will pass the authentication automatically otherwise they will be required to identify themselves by a username and a password e The Client Code Identification checkbox selection activates the code identification feature a caller after dialing the destination phone number may optionally enter and then an Identity Code An Identity Code is an arbitrary digit string entered by the user to identify a specific call or call group The Identity Code is sent with CDR to the RADIUS server and might be used by a billing program for grouping the calls having the same Identity Code The Check with 3PCC checkbox is used to request a 3PCC approval before placing a call with the specific routing rule When this checkbox is selected and the corresponding routing rule is used to place a call Quadro sends a request to the call controlling application for the managing person to accept or reject the specific call it can be a popup window or any other type of dialog box depending on the call controlling application If the request is accepted the call will be placed Otherwise if the request is rejected
210. length The Type drop down list is used to select the type of the extension User Extension Pickup Group Call Park Paging Group or Attendant to be created for details see below Fig Il 71 Extensions Management Add Entry page Edit opens the Edit Entry page where a newly created user or attendant extension settings might be adjusted To operate with Edit one or more record s have to be selected otherwise the No records selected error message will appear The Edit Entry page consists of two frames In the left frame settings groups are listed Clicking on the corresponding settings group displays their configuration options in the right frame Please Note Save changes before moving among settings groups Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 37 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus User Extension Settings 1 General Settings Mam SyHem Users Telephony Peernet Uptek This group requires extension s personal information and has the following components Extensions Management Edit Entry Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the Ganera Setters caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display when a call is made or a voice mail is sent General Settings 11 Password requires a password for the new extension The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered the Incor
211. lerid range gt used to apply the complete or a part of Number of Discarded Symbols 3 caller ID the callers number detected during the call as a i prefix For example lt callerid 1 3 gt indicates that the first 3 digits of the caller ID will be considered as a prefix lt callerid 3 end gt indicates that the caller ID from its 3 digit and up to the end will be applied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with wildcards e lt dialednum range gt used to apply the complete or a part of dialed number the number dialed by the caller to place Z Fmer on Caller Cali Type Modity Cater 10 a call as a prefix For example lt dialednum 1 3 gt indicates Z S t DateTime Pariodis that the first 3 digits of the dialed number will be considered as a prefix lt dialednum 3 end gt indicates that the dialed number from its 3 digit and up to the end will be applied as a prefix This tag can be used in combination with other poten digits at the beginning or at the end as well as with Fig Il 149 Call Routing Wizard page 1 wildcards The syntax aaa obb in the Prefix field allows for two stage dialing The aaa and bbb are the numbers to call bbb can also be a series of digits to inject a comma indicates a delay of one second The syntax can be applied to include more call destination numbers separated by time intervals A two stage dialing allows successive nu
212. link is used to restore the default welcome message Recurring Attendant Prompt this group allows updating the active recurring Auto Attendant message played after the Attendant Welcome Message and then periodically repeated while being in the Auto Attendant downloading it to the PC or restoring the default one The group offers the following components Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 46 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Upload new Recurring Attendant Prompt indicates the file name used to upload a new recurring auto attendant prompt The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u Law wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new Recurring Attendant Prompt file The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt and Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Recurring Attendant Prompt link is used to download the Recurring Attendant Prompt file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Recurring Attendant Prompt link is used to re
213. ll Quadro2x flavors 2x 2xi all Quadro4x flavors 4x 4xi and all Quadro16x flavors 16x 16xi Throughout this Administrator s Guide the Quadro4x is shown as the reference system This guide contains many example screen illustrations Since Quadro IP PBXs offer a wide variety of features and functionality the example screens shown may not appear exactly the same for your particular Quadro IP PBX as they appear in this manual The example screens are for illustrative and explanatory purposes and should not be construed to represent your own unique environment Quadro s Graphical Interface describes to the Quadro s graphical user interface and explains all recurrent buttons Administrator s Menus explains the Administrator s management pages according to the menu structure shown on the main page of the Quadro management Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide Administrator s Additional Features explains some input options for administrators only that may be selected from the extension user s main page Appendix PBX Services for Quadro s Administrator explains PBX features for administrator accessible from the handset Appendix Extension User s Welcome Page includes a form that allows the administrator to inform his extension user with all individually needed addresses and phone numbers Appendix System Default Values lists all factory defaults Appendix Software License Agreement includes the
214. ll soon learn it does much more Your Quadro Voice Router The Global Phone Network in a Box operates in much the same way as systems with which you are already familiar a telephone a PBX voice mail a phone book et cetera Beyond that the Quadro Voice Router provides capabilities you never believed were accessible in a customer premise telephony product Soon you will experience the freedom and power of the Quadro Voice Router The Global Phone Network in a Box To get started the following information is helpful PHONES Your extension number is lt extension number gt and your password is lt password gt optional Remember to type 00 when you pick up your phone receiver to find THE WELCOME SPOT O will take you directly to voice mail for your extension 4 will confirm your extension number LOCAL PHONE LINES Quadro2x offers one Quadro4x and Quadro4xi offer two Quadro16x offers four external phone lines They are lt 1 local phone line gt lt 2 local phone line gt lt 3 local phone line gt lt 4 local phone line gt IP To reach your Quadro Voice Rrouter from a network connection inside your office home or place of utilization connect a Web browser to lt IP address gt 172 30 0 1 is the default IP address The email address of your Quadro Voice Router System Administrator is lt email address gt His phone numbers are lt phone numbers gt SIP Your SIP number an Internet phone number is lt SIP number g
215. llowing components The manipulation radio buttons are used to select between particular CGI or a named group of CGls for which the legible configuration file will be generated e The Specific CGI selection allows you to choose a certain CGI from the list of Quadro s Web management pages for which the legible configuration can be manually managed For example selecting RTP Settings will generate a legible configuration file with parameters present on the RTP Settings page e The Named Group of CGls selection allows you to choose among the four predefined groups Internet Connection Settings LAN Configuration Settings Telephony General Settings and Extension Settings Each of these groups refer to all CGls characterized by the selected criteria e g Internet Connection Settings group contains all parameters on the CGls related to the networking and WAN configuration biaa kyo ime fehjpiay Medea res yack fet oa The Extension drop down list allows you to limit the settings in sista the generated legible configuration file to one specific extension a For example each of the extensions on the Quadro have own SIP settings or Codecs To download the settings for a particular extension only you need to choose the corresponding extension from the list The drop down may also have a blank selection In that case the legible configuration file will contain the parameter of all available extensions on the Quadro if the selected parameter applie
216. loaded and is used to download it to PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location can be specified Browse buttons open the file chooser window to browse for a new Call Queue welcome message file The uploaded files should to be in PCMU CCITT u Law wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading it with the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension which will cause the You do not have enough space warning message 6 Voice Mailbox Settings This group is used to configure voice mailbox storage and consists of a group of manipulation radio buttons to define the location where voice mails will be collected Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 40 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Disable Voice Mail disables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension With this selection the extension user will be unable to reach their Voice Mail Settings but will be able to access their Voice Mailbox and manage the existing voice mails Use Internal Voice Mail enables the Voice Mail service for the corresponding extension and defines the Quadro s internal storage as a location for the Voice Mails This selection also allows you to manipulate with the Voice Mail Configuration
217. lt template for all IP phones This template cannot be edited or deleted Add opens the Add Entry page where an IP phone template can be created The Add Entry page includes the following text fields fon fetes The teers T IP Phones Templates Fig Il 127 IP Phones Templates e Template Name text field indicates the name of the template This name will be visible in the Edit IP Line Settings page when defining the template for the IP phone e Description text field requires optional information about the template Edit opens the Edit Entry page where the selected template s settings can be adjusted ae lebegne ay beceren hae Wte IP Phones Templates Add Entry Fig Il 128 IP Phones Templates Add Entry The Edit Entry page contains several subpages for each supported IP phone model for which the template can be managed Aastra configuration page contains the following components Local Dial Plan indicates the number and pattern of digits dialed by the user in order to reach a particular destination Send Dial Plan Terminator is used to switch a dial plan terminator or timeout When the IP phone is configured to use a dial plan terminator such as the pound sign the phone waits for 4 or 5 seconds after the handset is picked up or a key is pressed to place a call Play a Ring Splash is used to switch a call waiting tone when there is an incoming call on the BLF Busy Lamp Field monitored
218. m SoundPoint IP 550SIP e SNOM 820 SIP phone e Aastra 57i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 601SIP e Aastra 480i SIP phone e Aastra 480e analog phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 650SIP e Aastra 9133 SIP phone e Grandstream BT100 e Polycom SoundStation IP 6000 e Aastra 9112i SIP phone e Grandstream BT200 o e Aastra 9143i 33i SIP phone e Grandstream GXP2000 o The Paging Group list is used to define the extensions that will be paged They will automatically go off hook when the paging call comes in The Access List is used to define PBX SIP or PSTN users that are explicitly allowed forbidden to activate the call paging using the corresponding extension When calling to the Paging Group extension the call will be forwarded to the extensions listed in the Paging Group table The phones of the called extensions will automatically go off hook the phone speaker automatically becomes activated and the caller will be able to make his announcement Since the paging call opens one way communication the called extensions will not be able to give an answer to the caller To terminate the paging call caller should simply hang up Attention Call paging will not work if the called extension is in call When caller not listed in the Access List calls the Paging Group extension password authorization using the password of the Paging Group extension will be required to start the call paging When a denied user tries to call the Paging Group extensi
219. m Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network C Py gl quadro Automatic Firmware Update Info Feedback will be given via the event system Enable Automatically Firmware Update Server Configuration Assign manually ServerName ftp epygi com The second manipulation buttons group on this page allows you samerPow 2l to select the frequency of checking for a new update Update Method ftp v e Check and notify choose this selection if you only User Name wish to be notified about the new available firmware on the server With this selection on the indicated RREREEE Password weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Assign automatically via DHCP Getthe TFTP server value from DHCP server This requires Quadro to be Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the configured as DHCP client also the DHCP server should be configured to provide ipi i the TFTP server name parameter option 66 server The way of notification is configured from the Events page Check for updates e Check and update choose this selection to check checkandnotiy EveyDay v aloo v and automatically install the new firmware on the Quadro as it becomes available on the server With ehediaid F this selection on the indicated weekday and time on daily or weekly basis the Quadro will check for a new firmware available on the server will automatically download and install it on the Quadro The Check Update
220. matically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox have no sense for Auto Attendant with custom scenario configured see Attendant Extension Settings The Description text field allows entering an optional comment Callback Settings The Enable Callback checkbox selection gives the possibility for a specified trusted caller to use the Instant Call Back service see chapter Call Back Services e The Callback Call Type drop down list includes possible callback call types PBX PSTN SIP and Auto The Callback Destination text field requires the destination number where Quadro should instantly call back to The value inserted in this field is dependent on the selected callback call type for PBX 2 digit extension is required for SIP the SIP address is requires and for PSTN a PSTN number is required Auto is used for undefined call types destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Call Routing table If this field is left empty the callers address will be implied as a callback destination Please Note The Call Back service is functional and enabled only for PSTN callers To Add an Authorized phone to the database Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones Database page Press the Add button on the Authorized Phones Database page The Add Entry page will appear in the browser window Choose the call type and ente
221. mbers to be dialed one after another with a delay in between For example 11 11018 will call 11 wait until the call is established wait for three seconds and then dial 11018 The capability of automatically dialing successive numbers allows the caller to bypass the IVR system on the call path and establish a direct call The two stage dialing is available for PBX and ISDN call types Suffix requires entering the symbols letters digits and any characters supported in the SIP username that will be placed in the end of the routing pattern For example if the routing Pattern is 12345 the Number of Discarded Symbols is two and the Prefix is 909 and Suffix is Oa the final phone number will be 9093450a Call Type gives you the option to select the call type The following call types are available e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions PBX Voicemail calls directly to the voice mailbox of the local PBX extension PBX Intercom local calls to PBX extensions with the request of Intercom service SIP calls through a SIP server SIP_Tunnel calls through a SIP tunnels established see SIP Tunnel Settings IP PSTN calls through the IP PSTN provider to the remote PSTN global telephone network FXO calls to a PSTN global telephone network ISDN calls to a ISDN global telephone network Metric allows entering a rating for the selected route in a range from 0 to 20 If a value is not inserted into this field 10 will be used as
222. me Passer Contin Parteid i Allow Call Relay Show on Public Directory Percentage of Total Merry fo w g Hack Al uyy aad Fig Il 91 Extensions Management Edit Entry page for multiple edit operation The Add Multiple Extensions link leads to the Add Multiple Extensions page where multiple extensions can be added to the Extensions Management table at once Add Multiple Extensions The Add Multiple Extensions is used to add multiple extensions to the Extensions Management table at once The page consists of the following components Type checkbox is used to select the type of the extensions User Extension Pickup Group Call Park Paging Group or Attendant to be created Quantity text field requires the number of extensions to be created at once For example inserting 5 in this text field will add 5 new extensions to the Extensions Management table Start from the Extension text field requires the number of the first new extension to be created Depending on the value in the Quantity text field the next extensions to be created will have subsequent numbers For example if you have inserted 41 in this text field and the Quantity text field contains the value 5 then extensions 41 42 43 44 and 45 will be added to the Extensions Management table If non digit symbols have been entered the error Incorrect Extension no symbol characters allowed will appear If an extension with the given numbers already exists
223. ministrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Pre Configured Call Back For Pre configured Call Back a list of trusted PSTN callers must be configured in the Quadro s Authorized Phones Database using Web Management The Call Back service should be enabled and a valid callback destination should be specified for each PSTN caller To use Pre configured Call Back the PSTN caller registered in the Authorized Phones Database simply calls to the PSTN number attached to the Quadro FXO line the FXO line should be previously routed to the Auto Attendant from the FXO Settings page from the global PSTN network Let the call to ring twice and then hang up Call Back will be instantly activated and Quadro will call back to the defined Call Back destination By answering the incoming call the PSTN party will be connected to the Auto Attendant menu Remote Call Back The Remote Call Back Configuration service is used by authorized PSTN caller to configure or reconfigure by an authorized PSTN caller using a phone and calling to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Remote Call Back Configuration is divided into two modes accessible from the Quadro s Auto Attendant Permanent Call Back and Non Permanent Call Back Please Note Remote Call Back Configuration services are only available when the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox is disabled in Authorized Phones Database for the trusted user Permanent Call Back service allows the callers registered in the Authoriz
224. n for each system event can be configured FAX Statistics bnan Syon Usma 8 Teleplicers karimat Uplink COET FAX Statisties The FAX statistics page is accessed from the Call Statistics page by clicking on the FAX link in the Details column for the calls that contain T 38 FAX transmission The FAX statistics page provides information about received and transmitted packets lost bad and duplicated packets This statistics refers only to the T 38 FAX transmission The FAX statistics is not available for the FAX transmitted with other protocols Fig Il 112 FAX Statistics page SI P Settings The SIP Settings provide information on the SIP receive UDP and TCP ports and allows you to select DNS server configurations for SIP and the SIP timers scheme The UDP Port indicates the SIP UDP User Datagram Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used The SIP UDP port cannot be in the selected RTP RTCP port range for A EE FXS and IP lines see RTP Settings otherwise the Mapped port SIP Settings for SIP shouldn t be in RTP port range error message appears men The TCP Port indicates the SIP TCP Transmission Control Protocol receive port number By default 5060 is selected and used Please Note Quadro will not use TCP protocol as a transport for SIP messages if the TCP Port field is left empty The TLS Port indicates the SIP TLS Transport Layer Security receive port number By default TLS po
225. n the enabler disabler key administrator s password will be required to be inserted QOO after the key Once the administrator s password is dialed system plays a confirmation about the accepted configuration and the state of the certain routing rule s is getting modified lf administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even to those which have no authorization enabled Administrator Login menu has the following sub menus and the management keys Auto Attendant Greeting Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to Current AA Greeting Record a New AA Greeting Restore Default AA Greeting Auto Attendant Menu Message Dial AA Number in case of multiple AAs on the Quadro Listen to AA Menu Message Record a New AA Menu Message Restore Default AA Menu Message Stop Recording Stop Recording or Playback Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x or Playback 6 86 Administrator s Login Greeting Message Listen to Current Greeting Message 2 Record a Universal Greeting Message Restore System Default Greeting Message Stop Recording or Playback Greeting Message Universal Extension Messages Incoming Blocking Message Listen to Current Incoming Blocking Message 2 Record a Universal Incoming Blocking Message Restore System
226. ncludes links to survey LAN WAN IPSec and PPP traffic correspondingly The VPN traffic link will be displayed only if a VPN has been configured The selection of these links will open a new window with a table of network traffic statistics on the following selected interfaces Received Bytes a Received Packets Received Errors e Received Drop Errors e Received Overrun Transmitted Bytes Transmitted Packets Transmitted Errors Transmitted Drop Errors Errors Transmitted Carrier e Received MultiCast Errors Packets Transmitted Fig Il 12 Quadro Status Network Status page Collisions When opening the corresponding interface statistics window no traffic values are displayed at first After opening the window the tables will serve as a counter and traffic statistics will be updated every minute DNS Server Alternative DNS Server and Default Gateway these display the Quadro settings corresponding to what has been configured with the System Configuration Wizard Services NTP Server and Client DHCP Server and Client DNS Firewall NAT PPP IDS statuses shows if they have stopped or if they are still running The View VPN Status link refers to the VPN Configuration page where all VPN IPSec PPTP and L2TP connections can be viewed and edited Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 11 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Transfer Statistics link to
227. ndant extension to forward calls If an inactive extension is chosen from this list the voice mail FAO Settings FAO 1 system will answer the call addressed to the corresponding FXO line If the Auto Attendant extension is chosen it will een et il sw ead become the default user for the corresponding FXO line on the Quadro Routing this selection allows you to forward the incoming calls to the destination defined through Call Routing This selection requires you to enter a routing pattern to the corresponding field Based on the registered PSTN users bia in the caller will be able to reach the destination according to Fig lI 132 FXO Line Settings page configurations in Call Routing Table By choosing a destination the Quadro administrator virtually assigns a default number that will start ringing when a call is initiated to the Quadro s PSTN number The PSTN Number text field allows you to enter the PSTN number that the current FXO line is attached to The field value is optional and used as an identification parameter for FXO lines The field value can be left empty Alternative AC Termination Mode appears if the local country Germany Israel France etc selected for Quadro has two COs that use different types of AC termination Contact your CO to learn about your AC termination mode Selecting the checkbox may help if the voice quality over FXO is poor or an echo is noticed To modify the FXO Settings 1 Select
228. nected to the same ISDN trunk from Quadro except for the PBX e In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to automatic mode Please Note Consult with your CO operator or network administrator before configuring the ISDN connection type The ISDN Wizard Page 2 content is dependent on the connection type selected on the previous page of ISDN Wizard Mam System Users Telephony BAe met Upin Network ISDN Wizard ISDN PTMP Settings Trunk 1 e The next page is ISDN Wizard MSN Settings page which is used to turn on the MSN configuration It is recommended to enable the MSN when there are multiple ISDN devices connected to the same ISDN bus If the MSN is enabled on this page the next page will require the MSN table configuration Fig Il 135 ISDN Wizard ISDN PRMP Settings For MSN service enabled the Routing Settings page is used to assign MSN numbers to the certain destinations on the Quadro The MSN number can be assigned to the Quadro s extensions to the Auto Attendant or to the routing agent The destination selected from this page will ring upon incoming call to the corresponding MSN number comes in Mam System Uses Telephony PA etivet Upir Network The fields in the MSN Number column require the MSN a R numbers allocated to the Quadro Routing Settings Please Note At least one MSN number should be defined in this page The system displays an error message if the same MSN number is used twic
229. nes this page contains a single checkbox only The Enable Expansion Module checkbox is used to enable the supplementary module attached to the IP phone The Expansion Modules Count drop down list allows you to select coa Lee how many additional expansion modules will be connected to the IP phone When the module is selected the number of programmable keys on the next page of the wizard is multiplied accordingly Fig Il 97 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Snom phone Mam System Users Telephony PAet inet Upir Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules Expansion Modules Module 1 SM Module S50M Module 3 535M For Aastra 55i and 57i IP phones Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules page contains a number of drop down lists to select the types of the expansion modules and the sequence in which they are connected to the IP phone Fig Il 98 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Hardware Modules for Aastra phone Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 52 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The next page of the wizard is available for Snom and Aastra phones This page is skipped for QCM Phone Model selection The content of this page depends on the configuration made on the first page of the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard The Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys C
230. ness to the SIP connection but increases the network traffic on the Quadro e Custom allows manually defining the Registration Timeout Registration Failure Timeout Transaction Duration and Session refresh timeout SIP timers in seconds RTP Settings The RTP Settings page allows the administrator to configure the codec s packet size and silence suppression for each voice codec to select the G726 codec standard to define RTP RTCP port ranges etc All parameters listed on this page may be modified and submitted The Codec Properties table lists all codecs with the corresponding packetization interval and information about silence suppression Edit opens the Edit RTP Settings page where the codec settings can be modified To use Edit only one codec may be selected at a time otherwise the One record should be selected error message appears The Packetization Interval is the time interval between two RTP packets of the same stream If the interval is increased the overhead is decreased but the voice quality may deteriorate as a result If the interval is decreased the network load is increased and the delay is reduced Codec Properties Coit Yo Main System Users Telephony internet Uplink Network Ci p J Sl TOvedrel2s RTP Settings Silence Suppression disables RTP packet transmission in contecs Packenzapon interval Sience suppression case of no voice activity This feature helps to avoid extra traffic s hedhiehshnentemnadhant
231. networks these LAN s must have different IP addresses As all Quadro devices have the same default IP addresses on delivery at least one of them must be reconfigured in order to set a new IP address Quadro supports several kinds of VPN connections such as IPSec L2TP and PPTP Man Stem Usas Telephony fer reed Ue Metwntk The VPN Configuration page offers IPSec Configuration and VPN Configuration PPTP L2TP Configuration links that lead to the corresponding feature settings pages Attention It is strongly recommended not to run different types of VPN tunnels between the same endpoints simultaneously Fig Il 168 VPN Configuration page An IPSec connection includes authentication and encryption to protect data integrity and confidentiality VPNs are virtual in the sense that individuals can use the public Internet as a means of securely accessing an internal network Once the IPSec connection is established users have access to the same network resources addresses and so forth as if they were connected locally VPNs are private because the data is encrypted between two VPN gateways Encryption makes it very difficult for anyone to intercept data and capture sensitive information such as passwords The Quadro can be set up to act as a VPN router when connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address or as an IPSec connection Road Warrior when using dynamic IP addresses Establishing an IPSec connection normally requires th
232. ng checkbox is used to enable user level logging This logging contains brief information about events on the Quadro The Enable Developer Logging checkbox is used to enable developer high level logging This logging contains detailed information about events on the Quadro The Archived Logging checkbox is used to keep more logs on the Quadro This option allows to collect more system information in the log files and to keep them longer Attention This option requires quite sufficient resources on the Mini eestor osc Tahoe iene ael 5 Quadro It is recommended to use this option in urgent cases only System Logs The Mark all Logs button is used to set a line marker in the logs If you need to follow a certain piece of log push this button to set a fails tack starting mark in all logs and then perform the needed actions over Diaa the Quadro When the actions are done push this button again to archived Logging set an ending mark in all logs This way you shall clearly see a mark antag Camenent Marie ter Tach Supper piece of log between the staring and ending marks generated __Bewnioad angs during the certain actions taken over the Quadro The Comment text field is used to insert some text information which will be displayed next to the marks inserted in the logs This comment may describe the problem captured in the following logs and may be useful for the Technical Support Fig Il 56 System Logs System Logs Settings page
233. ngs page The Routing Dial Timeout setting will also be applied to all the supported IP phones that are auto configured with the Quadro and provide the possibility of changing this setting through the auto configuration file The modified value of the setting will take effect after rebooting the IP phones 3PCC Settings Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Network Cepygi The 3PCC Settings page is used to adjust the third party call D Quadro controlling settings 3PCC service on the Quadro allows call controlling applications to remotely initiate and handle calls on 3PCC Settings the Quadro and to subscribe for certain event notifications from the Quadro Cl Secure Connection This page consists of the following components Request Timeout sec 10 The Secure Connection checkbox is used enable a secure ae hitii encrypted connection between the call controlling application WAN Port Not Opened and the Quadro Please Note For successful connection this option should wai Technologies Ltd All rights reserved be set up in the same way on both sides enabled or disabled on both sides Fig Il 161 3PCC Settings page The Request Timeout text field requires the timeout in seconds during which the Quadro should receive a response to the request from the call controlling application If the response is not received during this timeout Quadro will perform a request dependent default action For example if the call controll
234. nnection establishment termination Framer shows the number of packets as a result of an error condition TEI Request shows the number of packets containing TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier to initiate subscription of the device in the network Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of broadcast signaling packets received for call initiation and termination Exchange Identification shows the number of received packets containing connection management settings ISDN BRI Layer 2 Errors statistics Incorrect Length shows the number of packets with an incorrect length Bad Supervisory Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect supervisory header Bad Unnumbered Information Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered information frame header Bad Frame Type shows the number of packets with a bad frame type Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 74 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Bad Unnumbered Frame shows the number of packets with an incorrect unnumbered acknowledgement frame header Foreign TEI Value shows the number of packets with a bad or foreign TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier value ISDN BRI Layer 3 statistics Active Calls shows the number of currently active calls in the selected trunk Outgoing Calls shows the number of all outgoing calls in the selected trunk Incoming Calls shows the number of all incoming calls in the selected trunk
235. nput options Each record in the table has a corresponding checkbox assigned to its row The checkbox is used to delete or to edit the corresponding record Only one record may be edited at a time An error message will appear if no selection is made or more than one is selected Each column heading in the table is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The Add Entry page includes the following text fields Add opens the Add Entry page where a new IP range can be added Man Sifem Users Telephon biterteet Uplink Het eect NAT Traversal Settings Add Gin Deke Select all iraga Selec IP akie Fig Il 120 NAT Exclusion Table page Edit opens the Edit Entry page where the IP range can be modified This page includes the same components as the Add Entry page The NAT Exclusion Table lists all possible IP ranges that are not included in the NAT process but may be accessed directly IP addresses that are not listed in the NAT Exclusion Table are accessed over NAT Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 63 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mile Syste Iiia Bekil hermi Hink H ta k NAT Traversal Settings NAT Exclusion Table Add Entry i MAT Cuecho Table IP Clipboard IP address requires the IP address that is place
236. nsion settings applicable to all extensions on the Quadro This page disappears once being saved The Change Extension Length page consists of a radio Fig Il 69 Extensions Management Add Entry page button selection g g y pag e Leave Current Length radio button selection is used to leave the current length of extensions on the Quadro Per default the extensions length on the Quadro is 2 In front of this selection the actual configured length of extensions is displayed e Change Length radio button selection is used to change the actual length of extensions on the Quadro This selection enables the following information to be defined The Extension Length drop down list requires you to choose the length of the extensions on the Quadro This number will apply to all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions The length of the extension can be 2 3 or 4 The Extension Prefix text field is used to define a prefix with which all existing extensions on the Quadro as well as to any newly created extensions should start The prefix cannot start with the digits 0 or 9 otherwise an error message appears Please Note By saving the settings on the Change Extension Length page all existing extensions will lose the custom voice messages and voice mails in the voice mailbox The device will be rebooted You will not be automatically redirected to the login page so you need to access it manually again when reboot
237. nsmits the L2TP packets over the network to the L2TP network server LNS at the corporate side Large carriers also may use L2TP to offer remote POPs to smaller ISPs Users at the remote locations dial into the modem pool of an L2TP access concentrator which forwards the L2TP traffic over the Internet or private network to the L2TP servers at the ISP side which then sends them on to the Internet For PPTP and L2TP Connections two parties are required a Client and a Server The client is responsible for establishing the connection The server is waiting for clients it is not able to initiate the connection itself Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 96 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Attention L2TP tunnels have no data encryption mechanism Administrator s Menus The Host Name and a Password specify each side The client should know the server s name and password the Quadro server has no password and the server should set the client s host name and a password The client and server settings have to match on both sides for successful connection establishment Clients and Servers are identified by their hostnames which means that only one client can be connected to the server in the same network Servers also define the range of IP addresses that are assigned to the Server and Client hosts participating in a connection The PPTP L2TP Configuration link displays a page where a new PPTP and L2TP conne
238. ntahaminatadsinin pobtcnemiaicnsetamantened kashna ec if the RTP stream contains no voice activity It is activated after E S710 Ce suo coding stindard Giet h 06 KOIVS Gata cate 20 me two seconds of silence and restarted immediately if any audio a _ appears 4 726 24 ADPCM speech coding at 24 kbit s rate The G 726 Standard radio buttons are used to select between skaida packaging the G 726 codewords into octets If you experience problems with the G 726 voice quality when one of these packaging is selected try a different one e If Use ITU_T specification is selected the ITU 1 366 2 AAL2 type 2 service specific convergence sublayer for narrow band services type packaging of codewords is used where packing code words into octets is starting from the most significant rather than the least significant digit in the octet If Use IETF RFC is selected the IETF RFC RTP Profile for Audio and Video Conferences with Minimal Control type packaging of codewords is used where packing code a ss tea teri i anora mr words is starting from the least significant position in the Fig Il 114 RTP Settings page octet RTP RTCP Port Range e Min minimal port has to be higher than 1024 and lower than the maximal port range Only even numbers are allowed e Max maximal port has to be lower than 65536 and higher than the minimal port range Only odd numbers are allowed G 726 40 ADPCM speech coding af 40 kbil s ral
239. nually set up the VoIP Carrier settings e The Description field allows you to insert an optional description of the VoIP Carrier Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Fig Il 155 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 1 87 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 2 is used to define VoIP Carrier Settings The page contains following components VoIP Carrier Common Settings The Account Name text field requires a username for authentication on the defined SIP server The Password text field requires a password for authentication on the defined SIP server The Confirm Password text field requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error message Incorrect Password confirm will appear The SIP Server text field requires an IP address or the hostname of the SIP server destination party it is registered on The SIP Server Port text field requires the port number of the SIP server destination party it is registered on 2 VolP Carrier Advanced Settings Fig Il 156 VoIP Carrier Wizard page 2 Mam Syetenm Uema TeaphHt imamet Uplink VolP Carrler Wizard VoIP Carrier Settings Tiel Sitting Ciera yg oe Sprong Vopr Vonege ne 3061 Coie Pay Administrator s Menus TOF 168 7415 The Use RTP Proxy checkbox is applicable only when a route is used for calls towards a configured V
240. ny of the supported phones what additional configurations are required for a specific SIP phone and how to manipulate with the GUI Fig Il 125 IP Line Edit page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 66 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Use Session Timer enables the SIP session timer for the corresponding IP line This checkbox enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The Use Template drop down list is used select a preconfigured custom template for the IP phone When the Use default is selected in this drop down list the template selected on the IP Line Settings page will be used see above The Enable Hot Desking Capability checkbox is used to enable the Hot Desking feature on the corresponding IP line By pressing the Web link in the Details column for each configured SIP phone will lead you to the Web configuration page of the corresponding SIP phone Please Note This link only works from the LAN side of the Quadro i e when the Quadro s GUI is accessed from a PC located in the Quadro s LAN If you wish to connect the SIP phone s GUI through the WAN an appropriate Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Filtering Rules should be added on the Quadro The Advanced link in the Details column appears for the Snom and Aastra IP phones and takes you to t
241. o choose the key headers that are to be fully or partly hidden or replaced The Require Privacy checkbox selection is used to restrict the delivery of the SIP message if any of the selected headers cannot be hidden or replaced depending on the configuration of the SIP server before being sent to the destination The Port ID drop down list is present for FXO and ISDN call types and contains FXO line numbers and ISDN trunks Any Local and Any Any selections are only available for the FXO call type and provides the option to route calls via the first available local FXO line or any FXO lines including shared on other Quadro boards respectively The Call Routing Wizard Page 3 appears if the Fill Call Source Information checkbox had been enabled on Page ie Reem tee Mate 1 of the Call Routing Wizard It will require information PIEN about the Inbound caller The Inbound Caller Pattern field requires the caller AnA address for which the current route will be applied The we EN complete list of characters and wildcards allowed in this 2 saosin aN A text field is given in the chapter Allowed Characters and eG Wildcards inbound Call Type L d Eriry The Inbound Call Type drop down list gives you the option to select the call type PBX SIP ISDN FXO used by the inbound caller to reach the Quadro The settings in the Inbound Caller ID Modification group allow Caller IDs of inbound calls to be modified The Number of Discarded Symbols N
242. o the Quadro s Auto Attendant Non Permanent Call Back configuration service allows the trusted caller to organize one time Call Back to the defined PSTN destination In this situation no entry will be logged to the Authorized Phones Database By calling Quadro s PSTN number that is previously routed to the Auto Attendant and entering the Auto Attendant menu the caller is able to use the 5 menu see Feature Codes to modify the Call Back destination for the already registered Caller in the Authorized Phones Database The system will ask the caller to login by dialing the number and an appropriate password for the Quadro s extension that is used as login extension in the Call Back settings After successful login the PSTN caller should follow the voice instructions for reconfiguring the existing entry in Authorized Phone database The detected PSTN caller address must correspond to the one applied by the caller the FXO line must be available on the Quadro there must be network connectivity and the destination must be reachable The PSTN caller will then be disconnected from the Quadro s Auto Attendant and the defined Call Back destination will receive a call from the Quadro within the next 45 seconds Answering the incoming call the PSTN caller will be reconnected to the Quadro s Auto Attendant Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 56 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Telephony Menu
243. oIP Carrier from a peer located outside the Quadro When this checkbox is selected the RTP streams between external users will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will move directly between peers UserID requires an identification parameter to reach the SIP server It should have been provided by the SIP service provider and can be requested only for certain SIP servers For others the field should be left empty Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy enables the SIP registration server accessibility to the verification mechanism Timeout indicates the timeout between two attempts of SIP registration server accessibility verification If a reply is not received from the primary SIP server within this timeout the secondary SIP server will be contacted When the primary SIP server recovers SIP packets will continue to be sent to the server A group of Host address and Port text fields respectively require the host address IP address or the host name the port number of the Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and the Outbound Proxy for the Secondary SIP Server These settings are provided by the SIP servers providers and are used by Quadro to reach the selected SIP servers VoIP Carrier Wizard Page 3 contains the following VoIP Carrier access code selection components The Access Code text field requires a digit combination by dialing which the corresponding VoIP Carrier will be reached The Route Incom
244. ocedure SIP Tunnel drop down list appears only when the SIP_Tunnel Call Type is selected on the previous page The list is used to Raa select the particular SIP tunnel to route the calls through the Fig Il 150 Call Routing Wizard page 2 corresponding Quadro Destination Host requires the IP address or the host name of the destination for a direct call or the SIP server for calls through the SIP server This field is named Modified Destination Host if the Pattern field on the first page of this wizard contains symbol Destination Port requires the port number of the destination or of the SIP server This field is named Modified Destination Port if the Pattern field on the first page of this wizard contains symbol User Name and Password require the identification settings for the public SIP server or servers requiring authentication Enable Activity Timeout checkbox is used to limit time to live period of routing pattern makes sense if accept or failure feedback arrives too late from the destination Checkbox selection enables the Activity Timeout text field which is used to insert a routing pattern activity timeout in the range from 1 to 180 seconds When timeout is configured the routing pattern will be active within the defined time frame and if no response has been received from the destination during that period the pattern will be stopped and next routing rule might be optionally considered depending on t
245. ocking services for certain callers The users cannot change this information For more information on the Call Blocking Settings pages see the Incoming Call Blocking and Outgoing Call Blocking chapters of the Extensions Users Guide Manual Ill The Call Blocking pages accessed from the Caller ID Based Services table by clicking on the corresponding address gives the administrator the option to enable blocking services which could not be disabled by the users Along with the components seen by the user an additional Protect this entry checkbox is available in the Call Blocking Add Entry pages for administrator access only With this checkbox selected the user will be unable to deactivate the blocking services configured by the administrator Voice Mail Profiles When the administrator accesses the Voice Mail Settings of an extension there is an additional Voice Mail Profiles link present that leads to the page where custom voice mail profiles and their settings can be defined This link is hidden for the extension user s access The Voice Mail Profiles page is used to define and configure custom voice mail profiles The Voice Mail Profile is a group of most common Voice Mail Settings which can be saved under a specific name This allows you to have several versions of Voice Mail Settings configurations per extension Each Voice Mail Profile may have custom voice mail greeting maximum voice mail duration new voice mail notific
246. offers the following input options Service includes a list of possible services to be configured All user defined services also will be displayed in this list Action includes possible actions to setup the rule Forward to IP requires the destination IP address where traffic should be transferred to if it comes from the restricted host The IP address defined in this field will be ignored for blocked action of the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding rule Please Note It is not allowed to forward incoming packets when the NAT service is disabled on the Quadro Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 101 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Port Translation text field is available for Allowed action only and optionally requires the port number that will stand instead of the original port number when incoming packet is being forwarded If this field is left empty the original port number will be used when forwarding the packet Restriction radio buttons e Selecting Any blocks or allows all host IP addresses This selection is not present for the Management Access Blocked and Allowed IP List rules e Selecting Single IP will require the IP address of the allowed or blocked host e Selecting IP Mask will require the subnet to be allowed or blocked specified by an IP address and the Maskbits The following are Maskbit examples 255 0 0 0 8 255 255 0 0 16 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 255
247. ol symbol land to indicate that it is used as an ordinary character not a wildcard Example The pattern is 1 1 3 Numbers matching the pattern are 1 1 1 2 1 3 Please Note Patterns cannot be prefixed with the symbol The system considers the patterns starting with as feature codes and does not parse them through the Call Routing table Used to indicate the full SIP address example 20233 sip epygi com This pattern is mainly used to call back users registered on the SIP server different from the one where the called party is registered Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 84 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note Patterns containing symbol will not be parsed among those that do not have symbol in the Call Routing Table When calling from local extensions the calling number for local extension is sipnumber ip_address_of Quadro e g 20233 192 168 35 25 only the sipnumber part of the pattern will be parsed among other entries with symbol in the Call Routing Table Best Matching Algorithm All calls through and within a Quadro are made according to call routing patterns that specify a destination based on a dialed number When a user dials a number to make a call the Quadro matches the dialed number against the existing patterns that are specified in the Call Routing table If the dialed number matches only to a single pattern this pattern w
248. on Party does not accept your call message will be played to the caller When caller dials the Paging Group extension with empty Paging Group table Number dialed temporarily unavailable message will be played to the caller For Paging Group extensions Extensions Management Edit Entry page consists of General Settings SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages The SIP Settings and Advanced SIP Settings pages are the same as for the regular extensions see User Extension Settings while General Settings page has a different content 1 General Settings for paging group extension This group requires personal extension information and has the following components BW Syse Users Hephiary kiena ipik Hele k Display Name is an optional parameter used to recognize the Extensions Management Edit Entry caller Usually the display name appears on the called party s phone display whenever a call is performed General Settings 33 Password requires a password for the new extension PaAgeance Teor The extension password may only contain digits If non numeric symbols are entered an Incorrect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the error will appear Incorrect Password confirm The Edit Paging Group link leads to the page where a list of exten
249. on and accounting to differentiate to secure and to account for the users The RADIUS Server provides the option for a caller from through Quadro to pass authentication and to be able to dial a specific number When a RADIUS client is enabled on the Quadro and according to the configuration of AAA Required option see Call Routing table the RADIUS server will be used to authenticate user and or to account for the call This can be accomplished by automatic detection of the caller s number or a customized login prompt where the caller is expected to enter a username and password Transactions between the client and the RADIUS server are authenticated through the use of a shared Secret Key which is never sent over the network In addition user passwords are encrypted when sent between the client and RADIUS server to eliminate the possibility of a party viewing an unsecured network where they could determine a user s password If no response from the RADIUS Server is returned after the Receive Timeout expires the request is resent numerous times as defined in the Retry Count list The client can also forward requests to an alternate server s if the primary server is down or unreachable An alternate server can be used after a number of failed tries to the primary server Once the RADIUS server receives the request it determines if the sending client is valid A request from a client that the RADIUS server does not recognize must be silently discarded
250. on is verified Fig Il 55 System Diagnostic page The Start USB Flash Memory Testing button is used to test the USB flash memory attached to the Quadro The system will check whether the attached USB flash memory is supported by the Quadro or not as well as will perform the elementary procedures like mounting and data formatting on the USB flash memory If you use a USB flash memory not supported by the Quadro the system will inform you about that and you may still continue using that USB flash memory at your own risk The list of USB flash memories supported and tested with the Quadro is posted on the Epygi s Web download portal Attention During the USB flash memory testing all the data stored on it will be deleted The field below will display the diagnostics results and the connectivity conditions The system should be reconfigured if problems occur during the diagnostics Show System Logs link leads to the page where Quadro s logs might be viewed downloaded and the logging setting may be adjusted System Logs The System Logs page is accessible by pressing the Show System Logs link on the Diagnostics page This page is used to adjust where system logging settings view system logs directly in your browser or download them locally to your PC The System Logs page consists of three sub pages The System Logs Settings page is used to adjust the system logging settings and contains the following components The Enable User Loggi
251. on you re the USB flash disk Quadro can reuse the USB flash memory once it s formatted Each time the USB flash memory device is plugged into the Quadro it will be mounted automatically For safety purposes removing the USB flash memory device will result in it being automatically un mounted first Error messages will appear when formatting mounting or un mounting procedures are unsuccessful as well as when the USB flash memory device is write protected or undetected Replacing or removing the USB flash memory device from the Quadro the Quadro will automatically switch back to the Embedded Memory Storage and all further voice data will be stored in the Quadro s local flash memory Attention It is highly recommended to select Embedded Memory Storage prior to unplugging the USB flash memory device If this is not selected the data stored on the USB flash memory device may be corrupted or lost It is not recommended to remove one USB flash memory device and plug another one within 10 seconds otherwise the system may fail to detect the new USB flash memory device When attaching the USB flash memory device to the Quadro its voice data if any will be copied automatically from the Quadro s local flash to the external USB flash memory device If the USB flash memory device is too small to fit the voice data on the Quadro the Memory Allocation mode will still be switched to the External USB Flash however no voice data will be copied to the USB
252. onding password in order to make the phone assigned to the certain extension From that point forward and unless the user with log off the phone he may place and receive calls and use all the supplementary PBX services of the Quadro The Hot Desking feature is used to organize the user login logout on the public phones Each user should have a virtual extension configured in the Extensions Management table The virtual extensions can be configured as needed to use all the available supplementary PBX features when the user will log in from the phone with that extension The Hot Desking option should be enabled on the corresponding analogue or IP lines from the Line Settings or IP Line Settings page accordingly To login to the phone use the 78 feature code for more details see Feature Codes chapter You will be prompted for the extension and the password When you login to the phone with your extension the phone becomes a fully featured phone connected to the Quadro You may place and received calls with the SIP address configured in the Extensions Management page use Voice Mail services etc When you have finished using the phone logout with the 78 feature code From that moment forward your extension becomes again virtual and is not connected to any analogue or IP line but it still can handle calls using Call Forwarding Many Extension Ringing Hunt Grouping etc services and voice mails according to the supplementary service configured on that v
253. onfiguration page both for Aastra and Snom phones is used to set the correspondence between the selected Functions and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so assign a Function to each programmable key from the drop down list on this page The following options are available in Functions the drop down list e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro and a possibility to pickup the call addressed to that extension e Call Park Ext watch the calls parked to the corresponding extensions and a possibility to retrieve the calls parked to that extension This list also contains a number of PBX services available on the Quadro and accessible with the key combination see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this page the key combinations become transparent for the IP phones too e Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call e CallBack calls back to the last caller e Linelnfo gets the IP line information from the Quadro e CallBlk blocks the last caller For Snom phones when multiple IP lines are selected on the Attached IP Lines text field on the fi
254. onfirmed the firmware version a new page with firmware update progress will be displayed next There are no functions available on this page just information about the firmware update procedure At some point the connection with the device is being lost and you need to wait until the firmware will be burned on the Quadro You will not be automatically redirected to the Login page To access the Quadro s Web GUI you need to connect Quadro again and login Attention After the firmware update all IP phones attached to the Quadro should be restarted Fig Il 50 Firmware Update page Networking Tools The Networking Tools page provides the possibility to check the Internet connection Ping sends four ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol requests with a default size of 64 bytes to the destination IP address or host name specified in the text field Ping Target The response times are logged and the round trip time the time required from being sent until being received again is measured The minimum and maximum round trip time and its average as well as the percentage of lost and of received frames results are displayed in the lower area of the page Traceroute checks the Internet connection by triggering the routers hops that are passed to reach the destination specified in the Traceroute Target text field Trace routing gives feedback on the routers passed by packets on the way toward the destination and the round trip delay of p
255. opped packets and the senders responsible for those packets IDS discards dangerous packets or packets including intrusion attacks It generates a table with the IDS log report The administrator can be notified about newly logged entries in various ways mail display notification and Flashing LEDs depending on the settings in the Event Settings page To make an IDS log reporting table IDS needs to be enabled on the Firewall and NAT page The IDS Logs table is a list of new or read IDS entries and descriptions referring to them The table provides a status row that has the value New if the entry is still unread or it is empty if the entry has already been read Mark All as Read marks all IDS logged entries as read and removes the New status from the Status row of the IDS entries table Delete Log is used to delete all entries from the IDS table A detailed log of the selected entry can be seen by clicking on the Description link of the corresponding entry in the IDS Entries table The IDS Logs detailed page has a following preview The Issue Detailed Log table is a detailed list of new and read IDS entries The table contains a Status row that has the value New if the entry is still unread or that is empty if the entry has already been read Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus Mam Seam Use Tole miana Uplink Harani h IDS Logs kyk dk ig Haa Dekio Leg img A i Fi
256. or Paging group The Add functional button opens an Add Entry page where a new user with corresponding permissions might be created This page consists of the following components Bam Stem eas Telephony Heber net Uplink Hawak Call Type lists the available call types Access List Add Entry e PBX local calls from Quadro s extensions Ee e SIP calls through a SIP server T DODII gaip epai oa Seociepoard e PSTN calls from global telephone network ux ee e Auto used for undefined call types The destination see Bek independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP sect 2008 kakaha LA el reed address or PSTN number will be parsed through Call Fig Il 87 Access List of Extension Add Entry page for Paging Group Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address to be included in the Access List table The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Call Type defined in the same named drop down list If the PBX call type is selected the Quadro extension number should be defined in this field For the SIP call type the SIP address should be defined for the PSTN call type the PSTN user number should be defined here The Action drop down list is used to select the defined user s permissions allow or deny to use the Paging Group service for the extensions included in the Paging Group table Attendant Extension Settings For Attendant extensions the Extensions Management Edit Entry page cons
257. or all extensions on the Quadro They will be used when no custom messages have been uploaded or recorded The following system messages can be uploaded from this page e Hold Music played to the held user e Voice Mail Regular Greeting played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox e Voice Mail Out of Office Greeting played when a caller reaches the extension s voice mailbox if the Out of office greeting is enabled e Incoming call blocking played when a blocked user calls the extension e Outgoing call blocking played when the extension dials a blocked destination The Upload Universal Extension Recordings page consists of a table where the universal voice messages are listed Main System Users leleqiliiny kerni plink Hetwork An Upload functional link is present for each voice message recording that is not uploaded in the table and it is used to Upload Universal Extension Recordings upload the custom system message When a message is uploaded the Upload functional link is replaced by Download and Remove functional links respectively These are used to download to the PC and to remove the uploaded system message The Memory Allocation group includes a drop down list used to specify the Percentage of System Memory for the universal extension recordings The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro Fig Il 94 Upload Universal Extension R
258. or inactive entries Extension numbers in the Extensions Directory table are made as a link to move to the corresponding extension s Account Settings page This helps the administrator access the extension s settings page where a custom greeting can be manually uploaded Fig Il 101 Extension Directory table Move Up and Move Down are used to move the selected record one level up or down in the Extensions Directory table The sequence of the entries in the Extensions Directory is important if several records match the same spelled name The Extensions Directory table is parsed from the top down and the matched entries will be played according to their position in the table Mam System Users Telephony imeneet Uplink Network Extensions Directory Settings Add Entry Add opens the Add Entry page where a new name may be assigned to the extension An error message appears and prevents adding a new entry to the Extensions Directory if no extensions are available in the Extensions Management table The Add Entry page offers the following components Fig Il 102 Extensions Directory Add Entry page Name requires the name of the extension owner Several extensions can have the same name and a single extension may have several names Users Name is the identification parameter being searched within the Extensions Directory You should use uppercases letters in this field otherwise the name will automatically be changed to uppercase when
259. ord followed by the password confirmation to pass authentication on the RADIUS Server of the destination Quadro If these fields are left empty the original authentication settings that users enter for authentication will be used 3 Accounting Settings The Username field is dedicated for accounting services only It is used to insert an identification username for accounting purposes When no username is specified in this field the source username will be used for accounting Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 89 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Send Accounting messages manipulation radio buttons group is used to select sending both Start and Stop accounting messages or only Stop accounting message Voice Mail Common Settings The Voice Mail Common Settings page is used to configure the Voice Mail recording codec and memory allocation for voice mails and user defined system messages Quadro allows using USB flash memory devices for voice data files storage USB flash memory devices are basically a portable hard drive Using flash memory the USB flash device is compact lightweight durable and easy to use It can be plugged into one of the available USB ports on the Quadro Please Note The external USB flash memory capability is not available for Quadro2x models therefore the Voice Mail Common Settings page will only contain Recording Code
260. other type of uplink to the ISP A connection is needed to set up and make or receive calls through PPP over Ethernet The connection may be configured for manual setup or always up Once a connection has been established between the Quadro and the provider Quadro users will be able to make and receive calls at any time The PPP PPTP Settings page offers the following components The Advanced PPP Settings link refers to the same named page where certain parts of the negotiation process during connection establishment can be adjusted This link is not available when accessing this page through the Internet Configuration Wizard The PPTP Server text fields are only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and require the IP address of the PPTP server The Encryption drop down list is only enabled when Quadro is running with the PPTP interface and it is used to select the encryption for the traffic over the PPTP interface Authentication Settings require the Username and Password used for the authentication on the ISP server Dial Behavior radio buttons enables the following selections e Dial Manually if this radio button is activated a button will be displayed in the main management window that serves to switch the Internet connection PPP PPTP Settings on off When accessing the Internet every station of the connected LAN has to connect to Quadro first e Always connected Quadro stays in the always connected mode This
261. ox enables DTMF code transmission in parallel with the voice stream The destination receiving the DTMF code will play it locally if it a imis prom rence Hein etm See supports the feature This is helpful to avoid DTMF s loss upon tpi oe SNC a clog at TF chal ye bad traffic This feature is valuable for all codecs but it is especially recommended to enable it in case low bit rate codecs G 729 G 726 16 etc are selected The Enable T 38 FAX checkbox enables the FAX tone detection and the T 38 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the T 38 codec support for incoming unified FAX messages The Enable Pass Through FAX checkbox enables the FAX tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the FAX transmission from to the FAX machine modem attached to the line It also enables the G 711 codec support for incoming unified FAX messages 1 herie i PRL mmie a ae jn EEUE Fig Il 93 Extension Codecs list If both of the above checkboxes are enabled the T 38 codec will be used as a preferred codec for FAX transmission If it is not supported by the peer the G 711 codec will be used instead If the extension is attached to the line that has no FAX machine modem connected the extension is virtual or is attached to an IP line the incoming FAX can only be stored in the extension s voice mailbox To allow FAX to be stored in the voice mailbox the extension
262. ox for every IPSec connection to select it for further editing Start activates the connection establishment of the selected IPSec connection The State of the IPSec connection will change into Connected or Activated depending on the IPSec connection type If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected appears Attention It is not recommended to simultaneously start a static and a dynamic connection configured to use the same secret key A dynamic connection may capture the static connection peer and vice versa depending on which connection established first Stop disconnects the selected IPSec connection The state of the IPSec connection will change into Stopped If no record is selected the error message One Record should be selected will appear More than one record may be selected at a time to be stopped Fig Il 169 IPSec Connection Settings page Add leads to the Add IPSec Connection wizard where a new IPSec connection can be defined and specified The wizard provides several pages Edit leads to a set of IPSec Connection Properties pages to modify the parameters of the selected IPSec connection The page includes the same components as the Add IPSec Connection page To operate with Edit only one record may be selected otherwise an error message One row must be selected appears Restart all Connections restarts all active IPSec connections The State of these IPSec
263. p of manipulation radio buttons that allows you to enable the IP line and to configure it to for use by the SIP phones Inactive this selection disables the corresponding IP line ee l gt g beut yae eet Line Settings SIP Phone this selection configures the IP line for a SIP phone to be connected to the Quadro s LAN e Phone Model drop down list is used to select the IP phone model to be used by the receptionist The drop down list excluding Other selection enables the MAC address text fields used to insert the MAC Address of the corresponding SIP phone Use Other selection if your SIP phone is not in this list e Line Appearance text field requires a number of simultaneous calls supported by the SIP phone e Username and Password are required for this selection They should match on both the Quadro and the SIP phone for a successful connection Fig Il 124 IP Line Settings page For automatic SIP phone configuration the SIP phone should be reset rebooted The appropriate configuration will then be automatically downloaded from Quadro to the SIP Phone Please Note For automatic configuration some SIP phones may require additional actions to follow the restart For example by default the IP Dialog SIP Tone II is in a non auto provisioning mode so it should be manually enabled on the phone Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding SIP phone for instructions on performing a factory reset or reboot on a
264. page displays a table with the available IP lines on the Quadro Entering the feature key in the Features page can enable more IP lines Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox is used to setup the SIP phones connected to the Quadro via Plug and Play automatic configuration service To use this service this checkbox needs to be selected The SIP phone should be reset then After a clean boot up of the SIP phone Quadro will detect the SIP phone and all its characteristics generate the automatic configuration file and will upload it to the SIP phone The SIP phone will be then configured on the first available IP line of the Quadro and will become completely functional Please Note The Plug and Play service is only available for the supported SIP phones see the list below This service will not work in case the SIP phone is already manually configured or if it is not reset after enabling the Enable PnP to IP lines checkbox Enable Firmware Version Control checkbox is used to control the firmware version running on the SIP Phone attached to the Quadro This service also allows you to have the new firmware automatically downloaded and installed on your SIP Phone in case your SIP phone was running an old firmware upon connecting to the Quadro or when the Quadro s firmware has been updated and the compatibility was changed to the higher firmware version of the SIP phone Every new firmware of Quadro is compatible to a certain firmware version of each supported SI
265. page where universal extension system messages may be uploaded Call Statistics shows the current number of calls with recorded statistic entries Fig Il 23 Memory Status page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 15 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Hardware Status The Hardware Status table displays a list of the hardware devices present and currently available on the Quadro board The hardware device version number and additional comments about its state are indicated here SIP Registration Status The SIP Registration Status is a table displaying the SIP registration information of the Quadro extensions The table contains a list of all the registered extensions of the Quadro SIP registration name for each extension addresses of SIP servers where they are registered if applicable whether or not it is registered for each extension and the registration date and time By clicking on the row heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The links inside the table will link you to the Extensions Management page where the SIP registration settings may be altered The Detected Connection Type field displays the connection type Quadro currently is acting in direct connection or behind NAT If Quadro is acting behind NAT the NAT machine IP address is also displayed The Registered
266. parked user will remain on hold When the call park retrieve timeout expires the hold music stops playing to the parked user and a new call is being placed towards the extension initiating the call park If the extension initiating the call park does not answer the call the caller which has been recently parked will reach the extension s Voice Mailbox if enabled otherwise will be disconnected Fig Il 83 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings for call park extension page Paging Group Extension Settings Paging Group amp Access List The Paging Group service is used to page a group of extensions by forcing extensions to go off hook and opening one way communication The service is particularly used for announcements addressed to a group of extensions Service allows to page multiple extensions by dialing the Paging Group extension Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 43 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Please Note The Paging Group service requires called extensions to use one of the following SIP or analog phones which are able to automatically go off hook e SNOM 300 SIP phone e Aastra 9480 35i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 300SIP e SNOM 320 SIP phone e Aastra 51i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 330SIP e SNOM 360 SIP phone e Aastra 53i SIP phone e Polycom SoundPoint IP 501SIP e SNOM 370 SIP phone e Aastra 55i SIP phone e Polyco
267. pe Type A for all lines Busy Tone and Power Disconnect indications disabled for all lines Off hook caller ID disabled for all lines Hot Desking Capability disabled for all lines IP Lines Configuration Line Settings Enable PnP for IP lines enabled for Quadro2x and Quadro2xi Enable firmware version control enabled Phones Default Template systemdefault 1 16 IP Lines attached to 13 28 extensions IP Lines 1 8 enabled others disabled All IP lines are in inactive mode IP Phone Templates no custom templates IP Phone Logo disabled no custom logos uploaded Disabled IP lines displayed FXS Lines Loopback Settings Loopback is disabled for all FXS lines Loopback timeout is 30 Onboard Lines Configuration CallerlID Standard 2 FSK for all lines Ringer type Type A for all lines Busy Tone and Power Disconnect indications disabled for all lines Off hook caller ID disabled for all lines Hot Desking Capability disabled for all lines IP Lines Configuration Line Settings Enable PnP for IP lines enabled for Quadro4x and Quadro4xi Enable firmware version control enabled Phones Default Template systemdefault 1 62 IP Lines attached to 15 76 extensions IP Lines 1 30 enabled others disabled All IP lines are in inactive mode IP Phone Templates no custom templates IP Phone Logo disabled no custom logos uploaded Disabled IP lines displayed FXS Lines Loopback Settings
268. ph map Sper Fig Il 89 Extensions Management Edit Entry Attendant Scenario page 2ZeroOut this group is used to configure call redirection service on the Auto Attendant When a caller reaches the Auto Attendant he may want to accelerate the automatic redirection feature instead of using Auto Attendant features To activate ZeroOut caller should dial digit see Feature Codes during the Auto Attendant welcome message The caller will then be automatically transferred to the destination specified in this page Enable ZeroOut checkbox selection enables the ZeroOut feature and activates the following fields to be inserted Redirect Call Type drop down list includes the available call types o PBX local calls between Quadro extensions and the Auto Attendant o SIP calls through a SIP server o PSTN calls to PSTN O Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing The Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where the caller should be automatically forwarded to if activating the ZeroOut feature Attention The routing patterns in the Call Routing table starting with digit 0 will not work for incoming calls to attendant if both the ZeroOut and Send AA Digits to Routing Table options are enabled The ZeroOut feature has a higher priority If it is enabled and used the system will forward all incoming
269. phony baernoet Upled Netwoth DNS Server Settings Add Host 30 15 196 iP Clipboard Add functional link opens the page Add Host where a list of aliased can be defined for the certain device in the Quadro s LAN The page contains the following components IP Address text fields require the IP address of the device in the Quadro s LAN Hostname text field requires the hostname of the device in the Quadro s LAN Alias text fields are used to enter up to 5 alias names by which the device in the Quadro s LAN will be resolved Fig Il 196 DNS Server Settings Add Host page DHCP Settings for the LAN Interface The DHCP Settings page provides the option of enabling a DHCP server and controlling the Quadro user s LAN settings Therefore Quadro LAN users will automatically be provided with the following settings using the configured parameters IP addresses NTP corresponds to the Quadro s IP address WINS server Nameserver corresponds to the Quadro s IP address Domain name Main System Users Telepliony literiet Uplink Network The DHCP Settings page offers the following input options CIEE Sag FOr Reha Mere wy MHC Oc Enable DHCP Server Enable DHCP Server checkbox activates the DHCP server on Clone leases onty to hosts listed in the Special devices table Quadro With this checkbox enabled Quadro will be able to Dment adcres Range tom 172 Loo Lio 100 wcippoara wo h72 lao Lo 254 Pcmpboad assign dynam
270. r a caller address in the corresponding text field Select a Login Extension and the Automatically Enter Call Relay Menu checkbox if required Enable Call Back service if required and define a Call Back Destination in the same named field Fill in an optional Description in the appropriate field if required Press Save to submit the settings To Delete an Authorized phone from the database 1 Enter the desired Auto Attendant Settings page 2 Select Edit Authorized Phones Database to enter the Authorized Phones Database page 3 To remove an authorized phone s select one or more checkboxes of the corresponding records that should be deleted from the Authorized Phones Database table Press Select all if all records should be deleted 4 Press the Delete button on the Authorized Phones Database page 5 Confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes or cancel the action by clicking on No PaaS YS Call Back Services With Call Back service PSTN callers can save a call charge when calling to and through Quadro Quadro provides the possibility of creating a list of those trusted PSTN callers that are allowed to make free of charge calls to Quadro s Auto Attendant or through its Call Relay menu to the third party IP or PSTN destination Two types of Call Back services are available on the Quadro Pre configured Call Back and Remote Call Back Configuration Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 55 Quadro Manual Il Ad
271. r connections with the Shared Secret automatic keying selected For multiple road warriors to be started at the same time it is recommended to use RSA keying with Local ID and Remote ID fields configured e RSA requires the public RSA key of your IPSec Connection partner Please Note System prevents to start a connection with Shared Secret automatic keying selected if there is already a connection with RSA automatic keying started and vice versa The Local ID requires an IP address Quadro FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way Remote ID also requires an IP address the IPSec Connection partners FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name that is resolved to an IP address or any ed string that is used in the same way The Local ID and Remote ID text fields may have the values in one of the formats presented below e IP address example 10 1 19 32 e Host name example vpn epygi com This form requires additional resources to resolve the host name therefore it is not recommended to use this format e FQDN example vpn epygi com This form is considered as a string and is not being resolved It is recommended to use this form for most applications e user FQDN example quadro vpn epygi com This ee form is also considered as a string and IS not being Fig Il 172 IPSec Connection Wizard Automatic Keying Settings page resolved It has no advantag
272. r parameters Target State for the state of the route enabled or disabled Actual State for the state of the route connection up down or erroneous Priority for the route priority Route From is where the subnet routed packets come from and Via IP Address is where the router IP address incoming packets Mam System Users Teluphory _termet Up Network should be routed through IP Policy Routes Add opens the Add IP Policy Route page to establish a new 1wie Routes PPTPILITP Route i Si j s IP PolicyRowes FPTPAZTP Roy policy route Suite aiseta Raise Prorty Lower Priorfty ai EM Delete Select al inverse Selection Enable and Disable are used to activate or to deactivate the mre i an CSN selected route s disabled down 1155 51 21 on 192 168 75 235 Raise Priority and Lower Priority are used to increase or nanleg w vyrazene 182100750 decrease the priority of the selected policy route s by one At ek least one route should be selected to use these functions otherwise the error message No record s selected will appear Fig Il 30 IP Policy Routing table The Add IP Policy Route page offers the following input options Main System Users Telephony Brernet Uplind Network Priority requires a numeric value from 1 to 252 to define the priority of the routing rule The lower the number the sooner the Add IP Policy Route routing rule will take effect higher priority From requires the packet source IP address
273. r to zero The Restore Default Gains button restores the default values SIP Tunnel Settings The SIP Tunneling service is used to build a tunnel between Quardos and to use that tunnel for routing the SIP calls through the remote Quadros When this service is enabled slave Quadros should be registered on the master Quadro with the corresponding username password With the appropriate configuration done on the master Quadro the master device can use the slave Quadros for routing the SIP calls through them and accessing peers located behind the slave Quadro or recognized by it This enables the master Quadro to locate the slave even when the network settings like IP address SIP port and other settings are changed on the slave Quadro When the SIP Tunneling service is enabled virtual tunnels between the master and its slaves are created A possibility to use the created SIP tunnels will be automatically enabled in the Call Routing table Optionally a SIP tunnel can be mutually established on two Quadros allowing to route SIP calls back and forth A Quadro can be at the same time configured both as a slave and as a master to the same remote device i e the slave Quadro can act as a master for the master device it is registered on For example the Quadroi1 can act as a slave for the Quadro2 In its turn the Quadro2 can act as a slave for the Quadro1 With this configuration and the corresponding routing rules added in the Call Routing table on both
274. ration shows the current call duration RX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the incoming packets TX Codec shows the codec used to encrypt the outgoing packets If RX and TX codecs are the same only one Codec field will be displayed For IP Line Status the following dynamical parameters appear on this page Username shows the IP phone s client name registered on the Quadro Last Registered shows the date and time the corresponding IP phone has been last registered on the Quadro Expires In shows when the last registration of the IP phone will expire Binding IP Address shows the IP address of the IP phone within the Quadro s LAN network Man Sten Users Telepdeony bagnen Lipik Hinai ji Quadro Status Lines Status Lae 3 ars The list of supplementary services provides the following additional status information for each telephone line Enabled or Disabled For Incoming and Outgoing Call Blocking Speed Calling Hiding Caller Info Voice Mailbox and Group List services the number of Entries will be displayed in the corresponding service table For Voice Mail Service the voice mailbox configuration mode is displayed here This allows administrator to view the status and to be notified about services running on Quadro for every line The services are designed as links that guide the administrator to the corresponding service page of the selected user Fig Il 16 Quadro Status Lines Status Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi
275. rd empty 11 26 extensions are attached to the FXS lines 1 16 27 76 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 50 Use Kickback disabled Call Relay disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 11 26 2 Percentage of Total Memory for extensions 27 76 1 Registration username and password automatically generated SIP server sip epygi com SIP Server port 5060 SIP Server Registration enabled Authentication User Name undefined Send Keep alive Messages to Proxy disabled RTP Priority Level medium Do Not Use SIP Old Hold Method disabled Outbound Proxy Secondary SIP Server and Outbound Proxy for Secondary SIP Server undefined Port for Secondary SIP Server 5060 Remote Extension disabled Call Queue disabled Internal Voice Mail for all extensions except 12 Configuration Wizard Status activated Extension 12 Disabled Voice Mail Internal Voice Mail for all extensions except 14 Configuration Wizard Status activated Extension 14 Disabled Voice Mail Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 117 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Parameter Extension Settings Codecs Attendant 00 Settings General for Quadro2x models Attendant 00 Settings General for Quadro4x and Quadro16x models Attendant 00 Settings Attendant Scenario Attendant 00
276. rect Password no symbol characters allowed error will prevent making the extension Go To User Senings Confirm Password requires a password confirmation If the Go To Line Seetners input is not corresponding to the one in the Extension Password field the Incorrect Password confirm error will appear Fig Il 72 Extensions Management Edit Entry General Settings page Attached Line lists all free lines to where an extension may be attached Please Note Extensions cannot be detached from the line if the SIP Remote Extension service is enabled on it To detach the extension from the line disable the SIP Remote Extension service on the extension first Use Kickback checkbox enables the Kickback service on the extension for the blind call transfer When the extension transfers the call to the other extension and if there is no answer from the destination side the call will automatically get back to the extension who initiated the transfer instead of getting into the destination s voice mailbox or being disconnected Allow Call Relay enables the current extension to be used to access the Call Relay service in the Quadro s Auto Attendant It is recommended to define a proper and non empty password when enabling this feature in order to protect the Call Relay service from an unauthenticated access With the Show on Public Directory checkbox enabled the details of the corresponding extension will be displayed in the User Se
277. ro however this is not mandatory The User Name text field requires the authentication user name The field in front of this text field displays the default non editable prefix for SIP tunnels SIPTunnel_ The Password text field requires the authentication password Please Note The User Name and Password should match both on master and slave Quadros for the successful SIP tunnel establishment The Symmetric NAT checkbox should be selected when the slave Quadro is located behind the symmetrical NAT The Enable Tunnels to Master Devices checkbox enables the Quadro as a slave device and allows connecting to the master Quadro via SIP tunnel When this checkbox is enabled the Tunnels to Master Devices table needs to be configured The link Tunnels to Master Devices moves you to the page where a list of master devices needs to be defined Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Tebephony Shetivet Uplne Met woth SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices ht edn Dolot Setect ofl Bryer SP Iunat Noone P Tunne Fig Il 143 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices page Mam System Users Telephony Shetivet Upline SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Add Entry GIP Tunnel Name SP _Tunnel_Quadrog0 Fig Il 144 SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Slave Devices Add Entry page Main Symen Users Delepieany imernet Uplink Hehaorh Ca epygi SIP Tunnel Settings Tunnels to Master D
278. rst page of the Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard this list additionally contains the number of specified IP lines That selection is used to set the correspondence between the selected IP lines and the available Programmable keys on the IP Phone To do so select the IP lines corresponding to each programmable key from the Functions drop down list on this page Each programmable key on the Snom IP phone will now be responsible for the selected IP line on the Quadro Mam System Users Telephony BAe met Upin Hetwork Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration Prog ammabile Key Fumction PK 1 SUT Bora Technologies L ji agM reterred Mam System Users Telephony BAe met Up Network Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Softkeys Configuration Key Fiuctionality 1 Veatch Ext 41 Vma J CallFwd H OND Linelnfo CallBlk Veatch Ext 47 Watch Ext 71 lt iSe iSe iG ie es Call Park Ext 77 amp reterred ETAL Fig Il 99 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard Programmable Keys Configuration for Snom phone C icije Uh ks LS ik 4 Fig Il 100 Receptionist Phone Configuration Wizard SoftKeys Configuration for Aastra phone Administrator s Menus Please Note Once a new receptionist is created the Call Queue feature will be automatically enabled with the corresponding Call Queue Size and Max Call Queue Appearance settings on all extensions attached to the IP lines d
279. rt is not used and is empty coded to 0 TLS port number should be different from the TCP Port number The Reaml text field requires messaging level information to be included in SIP messages sent by Quadro This information might be used by remote side for authentication purposes Fig Il 113 SIP Settings page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 60 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Enable Session Timer enables advanced mechanisms for connection activity checking This option allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active The DNS server for SIP radio button group allows you to choose between regular DNS servers configured in the DNS Seitings page and specific DNS servers for SIP traffic e Use default is used to apply regular DNS servers for SIP traffic e Specific is used to enable SIP specific DNS servers For this selection both primary and secondary SIP DNS servers should be defined in the SIP DNS 1 and SIP DNS 2 text fields At the least a primary DNS server should be inserted The SIP Timers radio button group is used to define the timeouts of the SIP messages retransmission e RFC 3261 will apply standard SIP timers described in the corresponding specification e High availability will apply SIP timers to shorten the call establishment registration confirmation and registration failure procedures This selection provides more firm
280. rver e PSTN calls through the FXO J Auto used for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number SIP address or PSTN number will be reached through Routing e Redirect Address text field requires the destination address where caller should be automatically forwarded in case of activating the ZeroOut feature Restore Default Greeting File will restore the default greeting file If the checkbox is selected the file upload will be disabled Upload New Greeting File shows an attached greeting file selected by the current user The greeting file will be played to a caller party when it is entering the voice mail system The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will be received The system also prevents uploading in case not enough space is available on Quadro for the corresponding extension In this situation the You do not have enough space warning will be received Optionally greeting file can be recorded from the phone handset see Feature Codes The Browse button helps to choose the desired greeting file that should be in PCMU wave format Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 112 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Download Greeting File appears only if a file has been previously uploaded The link is used to download the
281. rver where the DynDNS service provider will relay your e mails Attention If this service is used ensure that there is port forwarding configured for SMTP port 25 to the internal e mail server The easyDNS Partner text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider easyDNS Selecting the Create Custom HTTP GET Request radio button will switch to the custom settings of the DynDNS service Normally the DynDNS provider uses HTTP get requests to map dynamic IP addresses to host names If the HTTP receive request is known to you choose the Create Custom HTTP GET Request radio button and enter the appropriate value into the URL text field The selection enables the following optional settings The URL text field requires the complete request to be sent to the DynDNS server Normally it has the following format http www server domain port scriptpath scriptname param1 value1 amp param2 value2 The request modifies the nameserver database so that the hostname will be resolved to the new IP address The Basic Authentication checkbox enables the encoding of the username and password entered in the text fields above and then uses the Basic Authentication method to notify the provider about the user authentication settings Most of the DynDNS providers require an authentication for security Authentication parameters can be provided in the URL text field to be used for the HTTP get request The Basic Authentication checkbox can be
282. s This button leads forward to the next page of a fixed sequence of pages used mainly in wizards Cancel This button discards the latest not yet This button confirms an operation you chose confirmed entries before Dele eee DUMON Ore eee This button discards an operation you chose Finish of pages that completes and saves the No p y This button confirms an operation you started before entries of an entire sequence peter This button opens the help page belonging to the currently active Quadro management page This button saves the settings modified on the currently active management page This button opens a window where the last This button opens a window where the last inserted IP addresses are listed It allows inserted SIP addresses are listed It allows the the user to make a quick selection of an IP user to make a quick selection of an IP address address that has been previously used eee that has been previously used This will avoid _IP Clipboard_ This will avoid the user needing type it SIP Clipboard the user needing type it again The clipboard again The clipboard can hold up to 10 IP can hold up to 10 SIP addresses and a new addresses and a new IP address will SIP address will replace the oldest one from the replace the oldest one from the list list Recurrent Functional Buttons In connection with the tables the following are the few buttons you will see Functional Button Description Ady Alos
283. s disables the Auto Attendant optional announcement message When this checkbox is selected but no custom announcement message is uploaded the default message will be played to callers Upload new Attendant Ringing Announcement indicates the file name used to upload an announcement The uploaded file needs to be in PCMU CCITT u Law wave format otherwise the system will prevent uploading and the Invalid audio file or format is not supported warning message will appear The system also prevents uploading if there is not enough memory available for the corresponding extension This will cause the You do not have enough space warning message to appear Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a new announcement The Download Ringing Announcement and Remove Ringing Announcement links appear only if a file has been uploaded previously The Download Ringing Announcement link is used to download the announcement file to the PC and opens the file chooser window where the saving location may be specified The Remove Ringing Announcement link is used to restore the default ring back tones Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 47 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Edit functional button provides a possibility of editing multiple extensions at the same time In this case fields that cannot be edited for multiple records have Multiple values in the Edit Entry page When editing user and attendant e
284. s page provides an option to enable Loopback diagnostics on the lines Main Syam Users Telephony ibeamet Uplink Hetaotk Line Settings snd Lae Sohier finaale Line Aychi riami Eate If Pinan Tye The Onboard Line Settings page shows the table Available Lines where all active lines of Quadro are listed with their Attached Extension If the line is attached to an extension the corresponding extension number is displayed in this column otherwise none is displayed if the extension is not attached to the line By clicking on the extension number the Extensions Management General Settings page will appear where the line attached to the extension can be reconfigured Additionally the table provides information about the selected Ringer Type and Caller ID detection method that is configured for the selected line The caller ID detection method is different for various types of phones and can be found in the phone manual The Loopback Settings link takes you to the page where lines can be configured for loopback diagnostics purposes Fig Il 122 Line Settings Page When pressing on the line number under the Available Lines column the Onboard Line Settings page specific for the current line is opened and offers the following input options Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 64 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Caller ID drop down list contains various standar
285. s selected incoming and outgoing RTP streams to and from the remote SIP phone will be routed through Quadro When the checkbox is not selected RTP packets will be moving directly between peers Mam System Users Telephony P ernet Upin Metwnoh Extensions Management Edit Entry When the Fallback To Local Extension When Not Registered checkbox is selected incoming calls towards the corresponding extension on the Quadro will be forwarded to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise when the remote SIP phone is unregistered incoming calls will be routed to the line extension it is attached to When this checkbox is not selected all incoming calls will be routed to the remote SIP phone only if it is registered Otherwise if the remote SIP phone is unregistered calls will be forwarded to the extension s voice SIP Remote Extension Settings 11 Ge To User Senings mailbox a 0s sine emia The Symmetric RTP checkbox should be selected when the i Fig Il 75 Extensions Management Edit Entry Remote Settings page remote extension is located behind the symmetrical NAT A j A Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 39 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide 5 Call Queue Settings This group is used to configure the Call Queue service that allows multiple incoming calls to be kept in the queue when being on the line and enables the calls to be answered in the order they h
286. s the following components Current System Time displays the local date and time on Quadro Mark all as read marks newly occurred events as read Disable LED switches off the flashing LED if applicable on the board An LED notification may appear depending on the notification type given in the page Events page when a new event occurs Fig Il 40 System Events list Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 23 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus a LTA Fj Bam Syeten Gees Pelepliony ibet Uplink Helwork C py l Event Settings A o o oa Oo oO o 00 Numerous circumstances may cause a certain application on Quadro to flag an event The Event Settings page lists all possible events on the Quadro and allows controlling notification action when an event takes place Oo A O e a Each entry in the events table has a checkbox assigned to each row By selecting the corresponding checkboxes operations such as Edit may be done for one or more events i Edit opens the Edit Event Settings page to modify the event TAES action Event Configuration Settings page The Edit Event Settings page offers the following input options EET i Main System Uiers Telephony bernet Uplink epyzi Application displays the application the event refers to punes Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been Edit Event Settings selec
287. s the short information full information is seen in the tool tip about extension specific voice Codecs Extension codec s can be accessed and modified by clicking on the link of the corresponding extension s Codecs The link leads to the Extension Codecs page Clicking on each user extension in the Extensions table will open the extension specific Extension Settings menu The Pickup Group Call Park and Paging Group extensions are displayed without a link in the Extensions Management table and extension pages Additionally the supplementary services configuration pages will not be accessible for this type of extensions Add opens the Add Entry page where the type and number Main Syston Users Telephony tornit Uplink Matwork of the new extension should be defined This page consists of the following components Extensions Management Add Entry The Extension text field is used to enter a new extension tension 17 number If non digit symbols have been entered the error User Extension Incorrect Extension no symbol characters allowed will sme C ask appear If an extension with the same number already exists in the Extensions Management table the error Extension already exists will appear Please Note Extension number cannot start with the digits 0 You can add extensions of up to 20 digits long However the Call Routing won t be adjusted automatically you may need to manually adjust the routing rules for extensions in custom
288. s to the extension and not to the overall system like RTP settings The Start generate a legible configuration file button start parsing the configuration structure of the device for the defined parameters The progress will be displayed in the area below Fig Il 37 Configuration Summary Parameters page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 21 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide The Cancel generation process button appears when the configuration generation procedure starts and it is used to stop it The Download generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to download the generated file to the PC in a plain text format Necessary changes can be made in the downloaded configuration file and then uploaded back to the system Attention Make sure the changes you have done in the downloaded legible configuration file are valid and will not corrupt the system when being uploaded back to device The View generated configuration button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to view the generated file directly in the browser The Restart generation button becomes available when the legible configuration generation is finished It is used to cancel the generated configuration file and to start over Administrator s Menus Man System Users Conferences Telephony kernet Upit Confi
289. s user should not answer the incoming calls so that they are forwarded to the voice mailbox Please Note If both of the above checkboxes are disabled no FAX transmission to the peer s voice mailbox will be possible Enable Pass Through Modem checkbox is only available for Auto Attendant and extensions attached to the FXS lines it is not available for extensions attached to the IP line This checkbox enables the modem tone detection and the G 711 codec support for the data transmission from to the modem attached to the line During data transmission Silence Suppression see RIP Settings and Echo Cancellation are being disabled on the line Please Note If the extension attendant is intended to accept modem connections disable the Enable T 38 FAX checkbox to allow the system to identify the modem tones correctly Otherwise the modem connection may fail The Force Self Codecs Preference for Inbound Calls checkbox enables the usage of your own preferred codecs if available on both peers for the IP connection establishment on the extension Call Park Service Call Park service is used to store a call on a specific number so that any other user on the system can retrieve it For example a user receives a Call but wants to take it in a conference room where it is possible to speak privately Transferring the call to the conference room is not an option because the conference room it is transferred to might be in use or the user is unable to walk
290. se Selection Move Move Denn Move Te Date Time period settings metric and description as well idedication econ oulon Nelieiea DT UGS URE Metric Description as automatically created and undeletable patterns created D ha le bo w n ae from the System Configuration Wizard If the ISDN trunk aT Pa z settings ISDN interface type signaling type etc have tampon T l K manciata been changed after defining the corresponding route 1 emo ar it anomien 2 kski invalid is displayed next to the ISDN routing pattern act Invalid ISDN patterns will not be allowed a 7 The alternating Show Detailed View and Show Brief View a a a A a Ca buttons are used to display entries in the Call Routing table in detailed and brief views correspondingly The brief view displays in ae ig A eee ae stan the most important settings of the routing rules The detailed C view displays all settings of the routing rules as they are armmrise configured in the Call Routing Wizard see below A Gg BRS ME i Fig Il 148 Call Routing table brief preview The alternating Hide disabled records and Show all records buttons are used to respectively hide or show disabled records in the Call Routing table The system does not consider the disabled records when parsing the table for the call route If the route has an Authentication or an Authentication amp Accounting selected from the AAA Required checkbox group it will have a lin
291. sed Materials to another party that also acquires your Quadro 4x or any Quadro SIP Gateway product If you sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials you must at the same time transfer the documentation to the acquirer Also you cannot sell your license rights in the Licensed Materials to another party unless that party also agrees to the terms and conditions of this Agreement Except as expressly permitted by this section you may not transfer the Licensed Materials to a third party 6 Protection And Security Except as permitted under Section 5 of this Agreement you agree not to deliver or otherwise make available the Licensed Materials or any part thereof to any person other than the Licensor or its employees without the prior written consent of the Licensor You agree to use your best efforts and take all reasonable steps to safeguard the Licensed Materials to ensure that no unauthorized person shall have access thereto and that no unauthorized copy publication disclosure or distribution thereof in whole or in part in any form shall be made 7 Limited Warranty The only warranty the Licensor makes to you in connection with this license is that the media on which the Licensed Materials are recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of one 1 year from the date of purchase the Warranty Period If you determine within the Warranty Period that the media on which the Licensed Materials are
292. selected from the list of values From field must indicate a shorter duration than the To field If the inserted data does not meet this condition the error message Minimal duration should be less than maximal duration prevents statistics filtering Calling Phone and Called Phone respectively require the caller and called party s SIP address see chapter Entering a SIP Addresses correctly extension or PSTN number as search criteria Wildcard symbols are allowed here The Call Statistics Successful Calls Missed Calls and Unsuccessful Outgoing Calls tables are lists of successful missed and unsuccessful incoming and outgoing calls and their parameters Call Start Time Call Duration Call destinations Each column heading in the tables is a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column Upon sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed close to the column heading The Details column is only present in Successful Calls table and provides the following information e Brief information about the call quality voice codec used to receive and transmit packets and the close call reason The close call reason appears to provide more information about the call termination reason which can be a network problem termination by one of the call parties voice mail service activation etc Clicking on the details information will open the RIP Statistics page where all RIP parameters of
293. sers Telephony intenni Uplink H work epyzi The Enable Dynamic DNS checkbox selection enables the Gynamic DNS service Dynamic DNS Settings The User text field requires the username specified during the registration at the DynDNS provider The Password text field requires the password specified during the registration at the DynDNS provider quacrousert Mi The Max time between updates text field requires entering the period between two updates in hours The values entered in these fields should be greater than 24 otherwise the error message Update interval times smaller than 24 hours are too small will appear Normally whenever you set up a connection to the Internet the DynDNS is updated at least once in the period indicated in this field The Use predefined service radio button leads to the manual T aoyphcom configuration of the DynDNS service The selection enables the F Basi au following optional settings The Service drop down list contains the provider list where the administrator needs to select the one that it has been subscribed to Fig Il 179 Dynamic DNS Settings page The Host text field requires the name of the host on the Internet The TZO Connection Type text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider TZO The DHS Cloak Title text field is used for a special parameter required by the DynDNS provider DHS The Mail Exchange text field requires the address of the e mail se
294. ses when system overload network failure or timeout expiration occurred e System Failure available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases indicated in Network Failure and Other fail reasons e Other available for SIP SIP Tunnel and IP PSTN call types and indicates cases when authorization negotiation not supported or request rejected or other unknown errors occur e Any stands for all failure reasons mentioned in the Failover Reason s group The Transport Protocol for SIP messages manipulation radio buttons group is available for SIP or IP PSTN call types only and allows you to select the transport UDP TCP or TLS to transmit the SIP messages through The SIP Privacy manipulation radio buttons group is only available for the SIP call type and allows you to select the security of the SIP route by means of hiding or replacing depending on the configuration of the SIP server the key headers of the SIP messages used to establish the call e Default Privacy with this selection Quadro specific SIP privacy will not be applied and all privacy will rely on the configuration of the SIP Server e Disable Privacy with this selection SIP call security will not be disabled and all headers of the SIP message will be transparently visible to the destination e Enable Privacy with this selection SIP privacy will be specified for the corresponding route This selection enables a group of checkboxes in order t
295. sible number of clients for the L2TP connection L2IP Seneet Contam ations PPTP L2TP Configuration Please Note The first address specified in the L2TP Subnet will be assigned to the L2TP server others will be assigned to the clients The L2TP server subnet should be different from the PPTP server subnet otherwise a corresponding error message will appear Fig Il 178 L2TPServer Configuration page To Specify an IPSec Connection 1 Press the Add button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection Wizard will appear in the browser window 2 Selecta VPN Peer Type and assign a name to the IPSec Connection Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 3 Enter the remote side IP parameters check subnets gateways for the connection select the NAT traversal option if needed and the desired keying type Press Next to go to the next page of the IPSec Connection wizard 4 Ifthe Automatic Keying type has been selected enter the automatic keying parameters and select the PFS and IPSec compression options if needed If the Manual Keying type has been selected enter the encryption and authentication keys and SP s 5 To specify an IPSec connection with these parameters press Finish Press Cancel to abort the operation To Manage an RSA key for the IPSec Connection 1 Press the RSA Key Management button on the IPSec Connection Settings page The IPSec Connection RSA Key will appear in the browser window
296. sions to be paged can be selected The Paging Group of Extension page lists all available regular and virtual extensions on the Quadro and allows you to manage the Paging Group Jajajaja Meese aD Kine faced Bao S elelelel oe ET E fx x Wlsl lale The Enable functional button is used to include the selected extension s to the Paging Group of the corresponding extension Once the call to the paging group comes in all the extensions in that group will be paged i e will automatically go off hook by automatic activation of the phone s speaker Jajaja AN Bant aat ni aam Li ray E The Disable functional button is used to exclude the selected extension s from the Paging Group of the corresponding extension Fig Il 85 Paging Group of Extension page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadro1l6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 44 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mim Syao Woes Tele priciny Miert Upin Nelvwoak Access List of Extenslon 67 Add Git Deletes Select af free se Selection Action The Edit Access List link leads to the page where permissions for users to use the Paging Group service can be defined The Access List of Extension page lists all users or a group of users if a wildcard is used and the appropriate permissions to use the Paging Group through the corresponding extension Fig Il 86 Access List of Extension page f
297. srssrrrrerrsrrrrerrnrrrrrrrerrerrrrorrrrrrrerrrnrsnrerrrrerrerrnrrererne 115 Appendix System Default ValUGS icsssriiurissrriorrein reni euan EAE EE EE E a A AE ESEEEEEES 116 e lan a E eeta e ala a Cone te ee E E E E E E E E E E ee A EE ee 116 Be tS ph NS aE E T 122 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Appendix Software License Agreement ccc cece cece eee eee een E EAE D DEED EDD rrr rnnr EEE EERE REESE se GEESE SEE EE SEES EES Manual Ill see Extension User s Guide Describes detailed the menus available for extension users and includes further all call codes at a glance Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide About this Administrator s Guide The Quadro Manual is divided into three parts e Manual l Installation Guide gives step by step instructions to provision the Quadro IP PBX and configure the phone extensions with the Epygi SIP Server After successfully configuring the Quadro IP PBX users will be able to make SIP phone calls to remote Quadro devices make local calls to the PSTN and access the Internet from devices connected to the LAN Manual ll Administrator s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for administrators only It includes a list of all System Default Values Manual lll Extension User s Guide explains all Quadro management menus available for extension users A list of all call codes can be found there too This Administrator s Guide explains a
298. state Man Sysheni Unies Dii heed oa pial Ligeia Hose ead be ISDH Status Trunk 1 Link displays the ISDN link state up or down Frame Synchronization displays the signal synchronization state in the trunk Yes or No HDLC Receive shows the number of packets received in HDLC High level Data Link Control format HDLC CRC Error shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check errors HDLC Packet Abort displays the number of received aborted packets HDLC Transmit displays the number of packets transmitted in HDLC format HDLC Octet Count displays the number of error packets received in HDLC format The following SDN BRI Layer 2 statistics are displayed for received and transmitted packets TEI value shows the actual TEI value L2 State shows the actual BRI L2 state Information Frame shows the number of signaling packets for call initiation and termination Receive Ready displays the number of controlling packets while the ISDN link is up Receive Not Ready displays the number of controlling packets in case of inability to accept calls by destination Fig Il 138 ISDN Trunk Status page SABME shows the number of packets upon connection establishment ji Disconnected Mode shows the number of packets when the connection is being disconnected Disconnect shows the number of packets upon connection termination Unnumbered Acknowledgement shows the number of packets upon accepting co
299. store the default Recurring Attendant Prompt Friendly Phones the Edit Authorized Phones Database link refers to the Authorized Phones Database page where a list of trusted external phones can be created If external SIP or PSTN users are added to the Quadro Authorized Phones database they are free to access the Auto Attendant Services without passing the authentication or to use the Call Back services The Custom manipulation radio button selection allows you to upload Attendant s custom scenario file and voice messages The selections are The Upload Scenario File indicates the file name used to upload a new scenario file The uploaded file needs to be in EpygiXML format the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support and is restricted to a 20KB file size Browse opens the file chooser window to browse for a custom scenario file Please note You may upload an attendant scenario file along with the voice prompt recordings as a single file To do this create an archive file of the tar gz type containing all the necessary files and upload it from the Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages page The View Download Scenario link appears only when a custom scenario file has been previously uploaded and is used to view or download the scenario file The Remove Scenario link is used to remove a custom scenario file and return to the default Auto Attendant scenario The Upload Custom Scenario Voice Messages link refers to th
300. t sip epygi com This is a number you can give people to reach you The SIP number to reach the Auto Attendant of your local Quadro is lt SIP number gt sip epygi com Your SIP group link to provide you a phone directory of numbers to call is http www epygi com sip grp_view php viewgrp lt groupname gt The email address of your SIP System Administrator is lt email address gt The phone number of your SIP System Administrator is lt phone numbers gt Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 115 Quadro Manual II Administrator s Guide Appendix System Default Values Appendix System Default Values Administrator Settings Parameter Admin Settings Quadro Hostname Quadro Domain Name LAN IP Address DHCP Server Regional Settings and Preferences Emergency and PSTN codes WAN Interface Protocol WAN Interface Bandwidth System Default Value Login name admin Password 19 quadro epygi config loc 172 30 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Enabled Give leases only to hosts listed in the Special devices table disabled IP Range 172 30 0 100 172 30 0 254 WINS 0 0 0 0 No special devices defined Locale US TimeZone Central Time US amp Canada Theme Dynamo Theme on Login disabled Emergency code 911 PSTN code 9 Ethernet Upstream 10000 Downstream 10000 Min Data Rate 0 WAN IP Automatically through DHCP Assigned by d
301. t Upin Menara Programmable Keys Configuration Top Keys Key Fuctonality Key Fuctionslity 1 a Mone Micon a i Hont Bottom Keys Key Fuctionalirg Key Fuctionelty g 7 1 SLA 1 L Limairin y e The following options are available in the Functionality i ET n _ a drop down list SLAJ vmail v s 4 SLA 4 ta hora il e Watch Ext watch the extension on the Quadro i ia and a possibility to pickup the call addressed to that 4 SLA 6 6 Nene 7 extension 7 DHD 7 Mone E Calf wd Hont ka e Call Park Ext watch the calls parked to the F corresponding extensions and a possibility to y CalBack 2 None F retrieve the calls parked to that extension Hard Key Line 4 Lay SLAG w e This list also contains a number of PBX services a eee available on the Quadro and accessible with the key combination see Quadro s Feature Codes When configured from this page the key combinations become Fig Il 126 Programmable Keys Configuration page the preview is individual for different IP phone model transparent for the IP phones too e Vmail accesses the voice mailbox of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e DND enables the Do Not Disturb service on the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e CallFwd accessed Forwarding Management of the extension to which the receptionist IP line is attached to e AutoReDI auto redials the last dialed call Quadro2x 2xi
302. t for additional LAN sided IP Phones Old nadies Debug support Fig Il 60 Features page Main Syaren Users Teleptsery imene Lipid CEET Features SUC a re iG ON Bi IA g sou Bak Fig Il 61 Features Add page To enter a Feature Key click Add A page with the Feature Key text field is opened Enter the key and press Save The status of the selected feature entry will change to Reboot needed Reboot the Quadro and the feature will receive the status Activated To receive a Feature Key register the Quadro device and send a corresponding request to Epygi s Technical Support This request must include the Unique ID that is displayed in the Features page above the features list Upload Language Pack The Upload Language Pack page allows you to upload a custom language for GUI and Voice Messages of the Quadro The language of voice messages can be switched to the custom Language Pack language from the GUI setting page in the System Configuration Wizard The language of GUI session can be changed to the custom Language Pack language from the radio buttons on the login page Uploading a language pack will also change the language of some supported IP phones Aastra snom v 6 x Grandstream GXP2000 After a custom Language Pack is uploaded onto the system reboot the IP phone to load a matching language onto the phone Uploading a Language Pack will cause the loss of the following data Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi
303. take effect immediately if there is no any active connection matching to that rule Otherwise if there is an active connection matching to the created blocking rule please restart the Quadro to make the newly created blocking rule effective immediately However if you are unable to restart the Quadro you may need to stop an existing active connection to make the newly created blocking rule effective Please note that in this case the blocking rule will take effect only in 3 minutes Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 100 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus View All displays all configured filters specified by their State enabled or disabled the selected Service the set Action allowed or blocked the IP addresses the filters apply to if Restricted and the destination of port forwarding Redirect to a ee eee eee eee os Ree in case of Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding Since it is read only no modifications are allowed and no functional buttons are Filtering Rules available View Filters for The Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filter is for incoming Via traffic The rules here allow or deny systems on the Internet to reach the services of Quadro s LAN The NAT service should be enabled on the Quadro to provide the possibility of Port Forwarding in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering rules The Port Forwarding function will be unavailable if NAT is disabled on
304. ted for the action assignment Name displays the name of the event Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been selected for the action assignment El Elfa Description displays additional information about the event Ble Multiple is shown here if more than one event has been senate selected for the action assignment Ei ame Dask Action offers radio buttons to choose one of the actions to notify the Quadro administrator when an event s takes place The following actions can be available Fig Il 42 Edit Event Settings page e Display Notification A notification link will be displayed on the bottom of all pages and a record is added into the Events table The notification is executed as a link Please Check you pending events The link leads to the System Events page This action also will take place if Flash LED or Send Mail has been selected even if not specifically selected 2 Flash LED The second LED yellow will blink every second and a notification will be displayed on the bottom of all pages For some events the LED will start flashing after a delay e Send Mail an e mail notification about the new event on the Quadro will be sent to the e mail address specified in the Mail Settings page e Send SNMP Trap an SNMP notification will be sent to the traphost s listed in the SNMP Trap Settings table see SNMP Settings e Send SMS an SMS notification about the new event on the Quadro will
305. th this service Quadro returns the correct IP address to the requested domain name so that any device in the LAN can be accessed by its hostname or alternative alias name The DNS Server Settings page is used to configure DNS server settings on the Quadro and to define a list of aliases for the devices in the Quadro s LAN This page contains the following components Zone field displays the Quadro s host domain name as it is configured in the System Configuration Wizard e Time to live TTL text field indicates the time in seconds during which the DNS server will keep the resolved names ie aie Ss Sai bine aS Teen Cepys in its cache During this time the same address will be resolved from the cache of the DNS server When this DNS Server Settings timeout expires the requested address will be resolved newly miad e Mail Exchange MX text field indicates the mail server s hostname When resolving the email address the reference will go to the mail server defined in this field before being sent out to the external network The value in this field will be used in the MX record in the DNS server on the Quadro e The table on this page lists aliases for each of the device in Fig ll 195 DNS Server Settings page the Quadro s LAN to be resolves through the DNS server Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 106 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Mam System Users Tele
306. the FXO line number from the FXO Settings table The FXO Settings FXO will appear where the line settings may be modified 2 Enable the FXO line to receive calls from the PSTN To reject calls from to the PSTN deselect the Enable FXO checkbox 3 If FXO has been enabled select the Call Type from the Allowed Call Type drop down list and the extension from the Route FXO Call to drop down list to route the FXO calls correspondingly 4 Insert a PSTN number in the same named text field to identify the FXO line 5 Enable Alternative AC Termination Mode if this is a requirement of your CO 6 Press Save to submit the FXO line settings Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 70 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide ISDN Settings The Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is distinguished by digital telephony and data transport services offered by regional telephone carriers ISDN involves the digitization of the telephone network which permits voice data text graphics music video and other source material to be transmitted over existing telephone wires The ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI service offers two B channels voice transfer and one D channel signaling data transfer The BRI B channel service operates at 64 kbit s and is meant to carry user data The BRI D channel service operates at 16 kbit s and is meant to carry control and signaling information although it can support user data transmission und
307. the Transfer Statistics page Man Syetem Users Telephony memet Uplink Network epygi The Transfer Statistics page shows a user defined statistics table with the transmit receive value criteria interface type and time period It contains the following components tstatene table Intraday E LAN m Transfer Statistics Time range of statistic table the drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram charts that are to be built 14 o o a Interface the drop down list offer the values e WAN Wide Area Network WAN events only e LAN Local Area Network LAN events only a amp Bmw Back When Show also as readable values checkbox is selected an additional table with statistics values will be displayed on Fig Il 13 Transfer Statistics page the next page M in Syal Users Deleplieadiyt Miben Uplink Ca Cp vE l The area Receive Values provides the following e Receive Bytes number of received bytes e Receive Packets number of received Ethernet packets e Receive Errors number of received packets containing errors e Receive Drop Errors number of received packets that have been discarded e Receive Overrun Errors number of received overrun errors that occur when the receive buffer is not large enough to hold all incoming packets This error usually appears due to a slow receiving system e Receive MultiCast Pack
308. the default If two route entries match a user s dial string the route with the lower metric will be chosen The Description text field requires an optional description of the routing pattern The Filter on Caller Call Type Modify Caller ID checkbox selection allows limiting the functionality of the current route to be used by the defined caller s only If this checkbox is enabled inbound caller information Inbound Caller Pattern Inbound Call Type Inbound Port ID etc will be required later in the Call Routing Wizard The Set Date Time Period s checkbox selection allows you to define a validity period s for current routing patterns to take place and to define pattern date time rules When this checkbox is enabled the Call Routing Wizard Page 5 will be displayed Require Authorization for Enabling Disabling checkbox is used to enable administrator s password authentication when enabler disabler keys are configured for the routing rule The service can be used locally from the handset see Feature Codes in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide or remotely from Auto Attendant see Auto Attendant Services in Manual Ill Extension Users Guide When this checkbox is selected administrator s password will be requested to enable disable the certain routing rule s If the administrator s password has been inserted incorrectly for 3 times no status changes will be applied to any of the routing record s even to those which have no authorizat
309. the details of the corresponding auto attendant extension will be displayed in the User Settings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual IIl Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if this auto attendant extension is reserved or not used The Percentage of System Memory drop down list is used to define the space for the Auto Attendant s system messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro 2 Attendant Scenario This group is used to select between default and custom attendant functionality scenarios When the Default scenario is selected a group of settings should be adjusted Here the user defined Auto Attendant system messages can be uploaded and the list of Friendly Phones can be configured For Custom scenario a scenario script file in EpygiXML coding the coding standard can be found at Epygi Technical Support should be defined and the custom voice messages can be uploaded The Default manipulation radio button selection enables the following components Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 45 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Send AA Digits to Routing Table checkbox selection switches t
310. the following components The Enable Automatically Firmware Update checkbox selection enables the automatic firmware update service on the Quadro Attention When the older firmware is installed on the Quadro the system configuration will be lost and the device will be factory reset The first manipulation buttons group on this page allows you to choose between the manually configured firmware server and the server defined by the DHCP server e Assign manually this selection is used to manually configure the firmware server settings The Server Name the IP address or hostname the Server Port and the Update Method should be defined The Update Method drop down list provides a possibility to choose among TFTP FTP HTTP or HTTPS methods For some of these selections authentication Username and Password can be entered e Assign automatically via DHCP choose this selection if the Quadro acts as a DHCP client in its WAN interface In this case the firmware server s configuration will be automatically obtained from the DHCP server This selection requires previous configuration on the firmware server and will work only if the auto update directory is created on the TFTP server The DHCP server should also be configured to provide the TFTP server name parameter option 66 to the Quadro Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 20 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus 2DV EO Main Syste
311. the host name of the traphost Administrating application s host address should be inserted here Community text field requires community description public private etc for the administrating application to accept the notifications about the certain events on the Quadro Field may contain some kind of password which should be the same both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management A group of radio buttons is used to select the SNMP protocol version used for events notifications delivered by the Quadro to the administrating application Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Man Sytem Users Telephony orme Upik Hatetak SNMP Trap Settings TAKI i cai eet hs Fig Il 53 SNMP Trap Settings page wan Seticm Users Pelephony Aer me Uplink Add SNMP Traphost 182 168205 Fig Il 54 Add SNMP Traphost page 30 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Diagnostics The System Diagnostic page gives a possibility of running Network and WAN protocol diagnostics to verify Quadro s connectivity and to download all system logs for possible problems recovery The Start Detecting WAN Protocol button is used to initiate WAN diagnostics that will detect the WAN IP configurations static or through DHCP and PPP servers For static WAN IP configuration gateway availability is checked When acting as a client DHCP and PPP servers accessibiliti
312. then configured to be used as hold music see Manual Ill Extension Users Guide or any other type of music played to the caller RTP Streaming Channels kbh bE Dris bisia oe iiam Gym dire Taigisay TELET Mrih um Hare L UF Ped Dp apie The RTP Streaming Channels page consists of a table where RTP channels are listed Add opens the Add Entry page where a new RTP channel j aani can be added Fig Il 162 RTP Streaming Channel page The Add Entry page includes the following text fields Wan Gen Tuas Tripi Ber ipii heran The RTP Channel Name text field requires the name or the number of the RTP channel i Streaming asaina Entry The Port Number text field requires the broadcasting RTP port number The Description text field requires optional information i Fig Il 163 RTP Streaming Channel Add Entry page related to the RTP streaming channel Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 91 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Internet Uplink Menu Mas em Une Telephony Internet Uplink EEP ETT Geng Quadrodx Managem orem tes tear ee ll a Wiser Talaphory riberes inlirik Active Calis VEN Corfiauration Lanamic DNS Settings Fig Il 164 Internet Uplink menu in Dynamo theme Fig Il 165 Internet Uplink menu in Plain theme PPP PPTP Settings The PPP PPTP Settings page is used to establish a connection over the DSL link or any
313. tically login with information if they have automatic access to Call Relay Menu of the Auto Attendant etc Each record in the table has an assigned checkbox The checkbox is used to edit or delete the corresponding record Fig Il 103 Authorized Phones Database The No records selected error message occurs if the user activates the edit or delete button with no records being selected The error message One record should be selected appears if the user tries to edit more than one record The heading of each column in the table has a link By clicking on the column heading the table will be sorted by the selected column When sorting ascending or descending arrows will be displayed next to the column heading The Add functional button refers to the Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page where new trusted users may be entered Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 54 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The Authorized Phones Database Add Entry page offers two groups of input options Mam Sysier Users Telephony fetes ret Lipid Network Caller Settings Authorized Phones Database Add Entry e The Call Type drop down list includes possible incoming call types PSTN SIP or Auto In SIP the caller connects Quadro through a SIP server and PSTN means the caller is a PSTN user Auto is used for undefined call types and the destination independent on whether
314. tion to any other damages assessed its reasonable attorneys fees and all other costs and expenses incurred in connection with settling or resolving such dispute If you have any questions about this Agreement please write to Epygi at 6900 North Dallas Parkway Suite 850 Plano Texas 75024 or call Epygi at 972 692 1166 Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 124
315. to the Ping and Portscanning operations Please Note Operations are available only when the firewall is enabled from the Firewall and NAT page ea This page offers the following components Advanced Firewall Configuration The Ping Stealth checkbox selection prohibits a Ping operation toward Quadro from its WAN The Fool Portscanner checkbox selection prohibits Quadro portscanning from its WAN As a reply to a Portscanning operation network unreachable or host unreachable feedback messages will be sent Fig Il 181 Advanced Firewall Settings page Filtering Rules The Filtering Rules page allows you to configure the filters for incoming and outgoing traffic To prevent inaccurate configuration only one rule per service is allowed The user may use IP groups to include several IP addresses for this rule Since the filtering rules specify the operation mode of the firewall they only take effect if the firewall has been enabled additionally NAT should be enabled to use the Port Forwarding function in the Incoming Traffic Port Forwarding filtering rules The filtering rules are independent from the security level so they will work if enabled no matter what security level has been selected Please Note Applying firewall rules will prevent the establishment of new connections that violate the rules Applying rules does not kill existing connections that violate the rule Attention The newly created blocking filtering rules will
316. to the conference room in time to answer the call The user can use Call Park to place the call at a specific number and then retrieve when they reach the conference room To use the Call Park feature the call parking service should be enabled for one or more extensions on the Quadro from the Extensions Management page To activate the Call Park service the Quadro user should dial the appropriate digit combination see Feature Codes during the call The destination party will be placed on hold while the SIP username of the first available extension is being configured for the call parking if the extension is registered on the SIP server The extension s PBX number will be played to the Quadro user The Call Parking is valid for 15 minutes During this time hold music if configured will be played to the parked destination party When the Call Park timeout expires the phone initiating the call parking will start to ring If no one picks up the parked call or if the phone is off hook the parked destination party will be automatically disconnected Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 49 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The pickup user will be able to pick up the parked call from any destination by calling the extension where the call has been parked Both PBX and IP calls are allowed For PBX calls the extension number should be dialed For IP calls the SIP address is played by the
317. to verify the secret key If the entered Secret Key does not correspond to the one in the Confirm Secret Key field the error message The Secret Key does not match Please try again will appear Retry Count allows you to select the number of attempts authorized before canceling the registration Receive Timeout allows you to select the timeout in seconds between two attempts to register Encoding Type allows you to select the encoding type PAP or CHAP that should be unique on both the client and the server sides for the establishment of a successful connection Encoding type should also be requested from the Radius Server administrator The Authorization Port text field requires the port number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the authentication Al Enable r requests The Accounting Port text field requires the port number on the RADIUS server where Quadro is to send the accounting Fig Il 158 Radius Client Settings page messages 2 Authentication Settings The Enable common login for all users in time of by Phone authentication checkbox enables custom settings for the callers who passed an authorization by phone on the Quadro This checkbox enables Username and Password text fields to insert the custom settings that will stand instead of the source caller s settings when being delivered to the RADIUS server The Authentication on Destination RADIUS Server parameters group is used to insert a Username and a Passw
318. ts Tene ia ist weeh iolar Hs pty Fig Il 19 FXO Channel Usage Statistics chart hin dyin a Telaphan kisiel lipih Het ep el Quadro Status Lines Status Las SS f i F i Trek ff Fig Il 20 Lines Status page 14 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics link is only present for local ISDN lines this option is not available for shared ISDN lines and leads to the page where diagram chart of ISDN trunks usage can be viewed The ISDN Channel Usage Statistics page consists of following components used to define the chart parameters Trunk checkboxes are used to select the ISDN line number s over which the ISDN traffic chart will be built At least one Trunk checkbox should be selected otherwise error message appears Mam System Usors Tebepdwoeny kem Uptrd Netrecth ISDN Channel Usage Statistics Time range of statistic table drop down list includes the period in days statistics data that is to be collected and the corresponding diagram chart that is to be built Incoming Calls and Outgoing Calls checkboxes are used to select whether the ISDN traffic statistics for only incoming or outgoing or for both type of calls should be displayed in the diagram chart Maximum Active Calls checkbox is used to have the number of maximum active calls displayed in the diagram chart At least one of these checkboxes should be selected otherwise error message appears
319. ttempts if the partner is still unreachable after the timeout period If the checkbox is not selected the system will continue to try to reach the IPSec connection partner The Internet Key Exchange IKE and Encapsulated Security payload ESP parameters are used to define the security of your VPN tunnel The Internet Key Exchange IKE parameters group is used to select the Encryption Authentication and Diffie Helman Group The Encapsulated Security payload ESP parameters group is used to select the Encryption and Authentication The Encryption drop down list offers the following standards for selection e Triple DES uses three DES encryptions on a single data block with three different keys to achieve a higher security than is available from a single DES pass block cipher algorithm with 64 bit blocks and a 56 bit key e AES 128 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block cipher which encrypts and decrypts 128 bit blocks of data e AES 192 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block cipher which encrypts and decrypts 192 bit blocks of data e AES 256 bit cryptography scheme is a symmetric block cipher which encrypts and decrypts 256 bit blocks of data The area Authentication offers the following parameters to be selected e SHA Secure Hash Algorithm is a strong digest algorithm proposed by the US NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology agency as a standard digest algorithm and is used in the Digital Signature standard FI
320. ttings table on the Main Page of the Extension s Quadro Web Management accessed by the extension s login see Manual III Extension User s Guide Besides this the details of the extension will be displayed in the Public Directories on the Snom and Aastra SIP phones Leave this checkbox unselected if the extension is reserved or not used or when the extension serves as an intermediate unit for call forwarding etc The Percentage of Total Memory drop down list allows you to select the space for the extension s voice mails and uploaded recorded greetings and blocking messages The maximum value in the drop down list is equal to the maximum available space for voice messages on Quadro When editing an existing extension and decreasing the voice mailbox size the system will check the present amount of voice mails in the mailbox of the extension lf the memory required for these voice mails exceeds the size entered the system will suggest either to remove all voice messages from the extension s voice mailbox or to select a larger size so that the existing voice messages can be stored in the mailbox The Enable Ringing Simulation checkbox is available on virtual extensions only and enables extra ring tones played to the caller before the voice mail of the called virtual extension gets activated If this checkbox is not enabled the voice mailbox will get activated immediately the call arrives The ring tones will be played during the timeout specif
321. u Internet Uplink Menu Network Menu e System Configuration Wizard e Call Statistics e PPP PPTP Settings e DNS Settings e Internet Configuration Wizard e SIP Settings e VPN Configuration e DNS Server Settings e Status e RTP Settings e Dynamic DNS Settings e DHCP Settings for the LAN e IP Routing Configuration e NAT Traversal Settings e Firewall and NAT Interface e Configuration Management e Line Settings e Filtering Rules e Events e ISDN Settings e IDS Log e Time Date Settings e External PSTN Gateways e Mail Settings e Gain Control e SMS Settings e SIP Tunnel Settings ee Registration Form e Firmware Update e Call Routing Sanaan a in menu tree only e Networking Tools e RADIUS Client Settings Oe ee ee e SNMP Settings e Voice Mail Common Settings Extensions Directory Logout i i 7 e Authorized Phones Database e Diagnostics e Dial Plan Settings Ss e Automatic Provisioning e 3PCC Settings e Features e Upload Language Pack e User Rights Management The functional button Renew Wan IP Address appears on the administrators main Quadro Management page if the Quadro device acts as a DHCP client The Renew WAN IP Address button is used to obtain a new WAN IP address in case e g the Quadro moves to another network The functional button Establish Your Internet Connection Now respectively Terminate Your Internet Connection Now occurs on the Quadro Management page if PPPoE is used as WAN interface protocol The link Please Check Your Pending Events w
322. uadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 94 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus The second page of the IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties serves to specify the members of the IPSec Connection and to set the basic parameters for encryption A group of radio buttons are used with Dynamic IP Road Warrior and Static IP Remote Gateway to select if the remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device is connected to the Internet with a dynamic IP address and is acting as a Road Warrior or is connected to the Internet with a fixed IP address ee dietat and is acting as a VPN Gateway SNe Te eT ae lf Dynamic IP RoadWarrior is selected the Remote Gateway IP Address text field will automatically generate the value any to allow access independent from the sending IP address Selecting Static IP Remote Gateway requires entering the IP address or the hostname of the remote Quadro or another VPN gateway device in the Remote Gateway text field Please Note The Static IP Remote Gateway selection is not possible if this Gateway is positioned behind NAT since the IP address of the remote gateway is not reachable directly in this case Fig Il 171 IPSec Connection Wizard IPSec Connection Properties Quadro lt gt Remote Gateway allows access from the local Quadro to the remote VPN gateway local subnet and remote subnet are not included This includes management access The checkbox is disa
323. uadro2x and Quadro2xi Extension Settings General for Quadro4x and Quadro4xi Extension Settings General for Quadro16x and Quadro16xi Extension Settings SIP Extension Settings SIP Advanced Extension Settings Remote Extension Settings Call Queue Extension Settings Voice Mailbox for Quadro2x models Extension Settings Voice Mailbox for Quadro4x and Quadro16x models Appendix System Default Values System Default Value Users admin enabled localadmin disabled Roles Extension all accessible pages for extension except for Extension Voice Mail Profiles Local Administrators all accessible pages for localadmin Extension Length 2 once applied extensions 00 11 28 appear Extension Length 2 once applied extensions 00 11 76 appear Extension Length 2 once applied extensions 00 11 76 appear Display name none Password empty 11 12 extensions attached to the FXS lines 1 2 13 28 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 16 Use Kickback disabled Call Relay disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory 5 Display name none Password empty 11 14 extensions attached to the FXS lines 1 4 15 76 extensions attached to the IP lines 1 62 Call Relay disabled Use Kickback disabled Show on Public Directory disabled Percentage of Total Memory 1 Display name none Passwo
324. uadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 29 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide System Contact text field requires optional information about the contact person responsible for the SNMP management in the defined network Field may indicate the point person s name email address phone number or other contact information Enable SNMP v1 2c checkbox is used to enable SNMP v1 2c protocol version for the messaging between Quadro s SNMP agent and the administrating application If this checkbox is not selected SNMP v1 will be implied SNMP v1 v2c Read Only Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read only management like gathering information events statistics etc about Quadro s Field may contain some kind of password which should be matching both on Quadro and on the administrating application for successful SNMP management Enable SNMP vi 2c Read Write Access checkbox additionally enables a read write access on the Quadro for the SNMP monitoring application With this checkbox enabled administrator will be able to remotely configure the Quadro via SNMP administrating program SNMP v1 v2c Read Write Community text field is used to insert the community description public private etc for the read write management like gathering information events statistics etc about Quadro s and remotely changing Quadro s configuration Field may
325. ulation radio button group allows a Syna Vons Tuuten SIRIU emet you to choose the connection type for the selected trunk s ISDN Wizard e PTP Point to Point ISDN Settings In case of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if only Quadro is connected to the ISDN trunk from CO no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from CO besides the Quadro In case of connection to the PBX Network interface type is selected on Quadro choose this option if only the PBX is connected to the ISDN trunk from the Quadro no other ISDN devices are connected to the particular ISDN trunk from the Quadro In both cases with this selection Quadro sets the TEI to manually mode assigning the default value of 0 If needed that euen t eni ie a aora men value can be changed later in the Advanced Settings page of Fig ll 134 ISDN Wizard ISDN Settings ISDN Wizard e PTMP Point to Multi Point e Incase of connection to the CO User interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices connected to the same ISDN trunk from CO except the Quadro Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x Administrator s Menus 71 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus e Incase of connection to PBX Network interface type is selected on the Quadro choose this option if there can be other devices con
326. use the next incoming call alert will be Usodna enau onkorin e heard in the background if Call Waiting service is enabled on a Cimecsiqveverneg ni Bowes the corresponding extension and the extension will hold the first Cs Cae call to answer the second one or they can be joined for a call conference However the next incoming call will again go to the call queue BPG eat Teenie a Al right omcerwaet Fig Il 76 Extensions Management Edit Entry Call Queue Settings page Enable Redirection checkbox is used to enable the call redirection to the other destination after some time spent in the queue This will avoid the caller to wait in the queue for too long This checkbox selection enables the following components Call Queue Message Repetition Count text field requires the number of call queue messages played during the caller is in the queue after which the call in the queue will be automatically redirected to the destination defined below Call Type lists the available call types e PBX local calls to Quadro s extensions e SIP calls through a SIP server e PSTN calls to a global telephone network e Auto used for undefined call types The destination independent on whether it is a PBX number a SIP address or a PSTN number will be reached through the Call Routing Table The Address text field is used to define the address where the call will be redirected The value in this field is strictly dependent on the Cal
327. uting table and will ignore the possible matches in the Extensions Management table Fig Il 147 Call Routing page e Attention Regardless of whether the Route all incoming SIP calls to Call Routing checkbox is selected or not SIP calls from external callers will or may go to the Call Routing table so any unprotected routing rule can be misused That is why it is strongly recommended to secure the rules in the Call Routing table by setting the filtering or authentication options e The Call Routing Table link leads to the Call Routing table where routing patterns may be manually defined e The Local AAA Table link leads to the page where local AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting database can be managed e Defining patterns in the Call Routing Table avoids registering Quadro at the routing management server and gives you an option to establish a direct connection to the destination or to use a SIP server for call routing Main System Users Telephony Internet Uplink Wetwork C PYS l e The Call Routing Table lists manually defined routing oh ss patterns along with their parameters pattern number state Grow Datanedview mo ai recorda HDS Number of Discarded Symbols UES Ute Extension Settings ML Bulligte Logini routing and inbound caller settings RTP Proxy and Enba Ditabie Add Edk Dupicme pekte Selec al bvwi
328. ved e Alert Guard Timeout requires the value for the Alert Guard Timer in milliseconds numeric values from 0 to 500 between CALL PROC and ALERT messages Alert Guard Timer it is used when Quadro is connected to a slow ISDN PBX Recommended values are hir yilmi e fast connection Oms normal 150ms default slow ISDN PBX 350ms e very slow ISDN PBX 500ms The Coding Type drop down list allows you to select between a law and mu law coding types Fig Il 137 ISDN Wizard I2 amp L3 Settings The Switch Type is another configuration parameter that depends on the Service Provider The Passive Mode checkbox is used to leave the ISDN Layer1 connection in the Slave mode When this checkbox is selected Layer1 remains idle when calls are not available When this checkbox is not selected Quadro keeps its Layer1 always active This checkbox enables the Enable TEI Remove Procedure and Permanent TEI Value checkboxes With the Enable TEI Remove Procedure checkbox is selected the trunk will lose the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 With the Permanent TEI Value checkbox is selected the trunk will keep the assigned TEI when entering into passive mode on the Layer 2 or when Quadro detected ISDN link DOWN signal from carrier These checkboxes are present only for connection types different from PTP Point to Point selected on the first page of ISDN Wizard In case if PTP Point to Point connection type
329. xcept as expressly provided for by this Agreement 2 Ownership By paying the purchase price for the Licensed Materials you are entitled to use the Licensed Materials according to the terms of this Agreement The Licensor however retains sole and exclusive title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials regardless of the form or media in or on which the original Licensed Materials and other copies may exist You acknowledge that the Licensed Materials are not your property and understand that any and all use and or the transfer of the Licensed Materials is subject to the terms of this Agreement 3 Term This license is effective until terminated This license will terminate if you fail to comply with any terms or conditions of this Agreement or you transfer possession of the Licensed Materials to a third party in violation of this Agreement You agree that upon such termination you will return the Licensed Materials to the Licensor at its request 4 No Unauthorized Copying or Modification The Licensed Materials are copyrighted and contain proprietary information and trade secrets of the Licensor Unauthorized copying modification or reproduction of the Licensed Materials is expressly forbidden Further you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or electronically transfer the Licensed Materials or translate the Licensed Materials into another language under penalty of law 5 Transfer You may sell your license rights in the Licen
330. xtensions together the Edit Entry page displays only those fields that are for both user extension and attendant settings Additionally for the fields that need to be modified a Select to modify fields checkbox alongside the corresponding field needs to be selected to submit changes otherwise the fields will not be updated Delete removes the selected extensions If no records are selected an error message occurs Deleting an extension from the Extensions Table will automatically remove the name attached to the deleted extension in Extensions Directory Hide extensions attached to disabled IP lines functional button is used to hide extensions which are attached to the disabled IP lines When this functional button is pressed it transforms to Show all extensions functional button which is used to show all hidden extensions To enable the lines install a feature key from the Features page Reset SIP Settings functional button is used to reset all SIP settings of the selected extension s to the default values including all settings listed under SIP Settings and SIP Advanced Settings pages see below The Upload Universal Extension Recordings link leads to the page where universal default voice messages for all extensions are defined Administrator s Menus Man Sytem Users Telepheey Dred craved Upik Hetrvctk Extensions Management Edit Entry eee Sets General Settings 11 12 13 Sulect ip E modiy Halde Digslay Hi
331. y be added to the group Enter an IP address for the member in the IP Address text fields select a IP subnet or IP group from the User defined Group drop down list to Enter a Member Description in the corresponding text field if needed To add a member with these parameters to the selected group press Save 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Click on the desired members that should be deleted The IP Pool Group Configuration list will appear 3 Check one or more checkboxes of the corresponding members that should be deleted from the Members table Press Select all if all members should be deleted 4 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Group Configuration page 5 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cancel the deletion by pressing on No To Delete a Group 1 Select the Manage IP Pool Groups link The IP Pool Configuration page appears with the table of groups if any 2 Check the one or more checkboxes of the corresponding groups that should be deleted from the groups table Press Select all if all groups should be deleted 3 Press the Delete button on the IP Pool Configuration page 4 Confirm the deletion by pressing on Yes or cancel the deletion by pressing on No Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 104 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide IDS Log The IDS logging page contains information about dr
332. y name and the port number are optional parameters in the display name lt username ipaddress port gt SIP address If a port is not specified 5060 will be set up as the default display name lt username ipaddress gt one The range of valid ports is between 1024 and 65536 username ipaddress port A flexible structure of wildcards is allowed In comparison with a username ipaddress wildcard the character stands for only one unknown digit and the username character stands for any number of any digits For your convenience the following combinations can be used Please Note Wildcards are available for caller addresses only No wildcard characters are allowed for called party addresses Exceptions are addresses in the Supplementary Addresses table that are used by e username a specified user from any SIP server Outgoing Call Blocking and Hiding Caller Information Settings services To use and alone as non wildcard characters use and correspondingly e ipaddress any user from the specified SIP server e any user from any SIP server Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi QUadrol6x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 6 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Administrator s Menus Administrator s Menus System Menu ft Management West Bighi Man Fee eve Wap P Aij Fig Il 1 System Menu in Dynamo theme Fig Il 2 System Menu in Plain theme System Configuration Wizar
333. y want to continue Answer Yes e WAN interface type PPPoE or Ethernet eee ace wacenane o WAN IP settings as fe a pees configuration PPP settings e ISP settings Back DHCP settings b DNS settings Copyright C 2004 Epygi Technologies Ltd All rights reserved NAT Traversal settings Fig Il 59 Auto Provisioning page Quadro2x 2xi Quadro4x 4xi Quadro16x 16xi SW Version 5 1 x 32 Quadro Manual Il Administrator s Guide Features Administrator s Menus This page lists all features that may be activated by a software key characterized by a Feature Description and provided with its Status e No Key Found the feature is currently not available e Reboot Needed the feature key has been entered and Quadro needs to be rebooted e Activated the feature is now available on the Quadro Following features may be activated via the software key e IP Phone support enables additional LAN sided IP phones on the Quadro On Quadro4x and quadro16x models this feature key allows you to activate two packages of 16 IP lines support The feature key inserted once will activate additional 16 IP lines The feature key inserted twice will activate additional 32 IP lines On Quadro2x models this feature allows to activate 8 IP lines support with a single key e Debug enables Telnet connection towards the Quadro for debugging purposes e 3pcc Support enables Third Party Call Control feature on the Quadro The feature
334. ypted with the remote party s public key They can be decrypting the data with their private key and the data encrypted there with Quadro s public key can be decrypted with Quadro s private key Since the private key is never transmitted it stays completely unknown to everyone thus the system remains safe Even if someone gets the public key decryption cannot be possible without the private key Quadro generates such a pair of keys automatically when it is set up The user cannot see the private key but must know the public key because their IPSec connection partner will need it Please Note A pair of keys will always be generated a public one and a private one The previously generated pair of keys will become invalid as well as all existing IPSec connections that use RSA keying The IPSec Configuration link refers to the page where IPSec connections can be created and managed The IPSec Configuration page consists of two sub pages Connection and RSA Key Management The Connection sub page provides an overview of all existing IPSec connections characterized by their Connection Name the Remote Gateway the IP address or the hostname of the IPSec connection partner the State of the IPSec connection Stopped Connecting Activated Waiting or Connected and the dedicated Keying Type the encryption type The content of the table can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the header of the respective column There is a checkb
335. ystem Mail is enabled on the Quadro see Mail Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail delivery via email Send new voice message notification via SMS allows voice mail notification delivery via SMS to the defined mobile number Checkbox activates the following input options Mobile Number text field requires the destination s mobile number The next two fields are used for retransmission of SMS notifications The Number of times text field requires the maximum number of times the notification should be delivered to the recipient within the interval in minutes defined in the Repeat every text field If notification is required to be sent only once insert 1 in Repeat every text field and 0 in the Number of times text field Please Note This service will work only when SMS Service is enabled on the Quadro see SMS Settings Contact your system administrator if you have problems with voice mail notifications delivery via SMS Send new voice message notification via phone call enables the voice mail notification delivery via phone call to the defined phone number The checkbox activates the following input options Call Type drop down list includes the available call types e PBX local calls to Quadro extensions e SIP calls through a SIP server e Auto for undefined call types Destination independent on whether it is a PBX number or SIP address will be reached through Routing e Callback

Quadro Manual II: Administrator`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents